Yamaha Electone Stagea 01C Owner`s manual

ELB-01
Owner’s Manual
EN
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,
or roll anything over it.
Do not open
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If you notice any abnormality
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable
parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use
immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual
smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or
damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Location
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the
internal components.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause
overheating in the outlet.
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or
radio may generate noise.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
Assembly
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly
process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might
result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using
is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately
turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch
from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly
result in the instrument overheating.
2
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
(1)B-9
1/2
Connections
Using the bench (If included)
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
level.
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint
thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Handling caution
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or
step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the
rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised
use may result in accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten
them periodically using the included tool.
Saving data
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the
panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this
might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and
do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Saving and backing up your data
• Always save data to a USB Flash Memory, in order to help prevent the loss
of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Backing up the USB storage device
• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that
you save your important data onto two external media.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.
If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use
or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
The serial number of this product may be found on the
bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the
space provided below and retain this manual as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in
the event of theft.
Model No.
ELB-01
Serial No.
(bottom)
(1)B-9
2/2
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
3
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELB-01.
The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the
art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical
versatility.
In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to
read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a
safe place for later reference.
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
4
Bench
Dust Cover
Music Rest
Owner’s Manual
Playing the ELB-01 — Tutorial Guidebook
Assembly Instructions
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
The ELB-01 is compatible with the following formats.
“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System
Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data
compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice
parameters, and integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha
specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over
Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations,
as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single
unified format.
AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product.
Copyright © 1986-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD.
AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this
product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD.
• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or
with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without
limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized
use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except
for your personal use.
• Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
5
Contents
Congratulations! ........................................................ 4
Accessories ............................................................... 4
Main Features ............................................................ 8
Accompaniment ....................................................... 68
Automatic Accompaniment
—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)..................................... 71
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ...................................... 74
Keyboard Percussion............................................... 77
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion.......... 77
Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/
reverb ............................................................. 78
Preset Keyboard Percussion List ................... 80
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard
Percussion ...................................................... 88
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion....... 92
Kit Assign List ................................................. 93
Panel Layout ....................................9
Overview .................................................................... 9
Front Panel............................................................... 10
1
6
Quick Introductory Guide .............12
Getting Started......................................................... 12
Registration Menu.................................................... 14
Selecting Registrations from the Registration
Menu .............................................................. 14
Registration Menu List.................................... 15
Using the LCD display............................................. 17
LCD Display and LCD Buttons....................... 17
Changing the Display Page ........................... 18
Selecting a Voice or Rhythm .......................... 18
Basic Operation ....................................................... 19
Selecting the Display Language .................... 19
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) ............. 20
Confirming the Version of Your Electone ....... 20
2
Voices .............................................21
3
Voice Controls and Effects ...........40
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion .....56
Voices for each keyboard........................................ 21
Voice Display ........................................................... 23
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................. 25
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1 .............. 25
Adjusting the Voice volume............................ 26
On/Off status of Voices .................................. 28
Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2 ...................... 29
Switching between Voice section 1
and Voice section 2........................................ 29
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ............. 30
Selecting Voices from the User buttons .................. 32
Voice List ................................................................. 34
Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............. 41
Selecting from the panel.......................................... 48
Reverb............................................................ 48
Sustain............................................................ 49
Rotary Speaker............................................... 50
Effect List ................................................................. 52
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons............. 56
To select and play a rhythm ........................... 56
Operating the rhythm from the panel ............. 59
Adjusting the tempo ....................................... 61
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb.............. 62
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons ................ 63
To call up a User rhythm ................................ 64
Selecting Rhythm from an External Media ..... 65
Rhythm List..................................................... 67
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
5
Registration Memory .................... 97
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)....... 107
Storing Registrations ................................................ 97
Selecting Registrations ............................................ 99
Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory100
Initializing Registration Memory ............................. 100
Registration Shift .................................................... 102
Using the M.D.R. Function ..................................... 108
Formatting External Media ..................................... 109
Selecting a Song .................................................... 111
Recording............................................................... 117
Recording ..................................................... 117
Re-recording (Retry)..................................... 118
Recording Each Part Separately .................. 118
Punch-in Recording...................................... 121
Changing the Song/Folder Name .......................... 122
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) .... 124
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to
One Song...................................................... 126
Replacing Registrations ............................... 127
Deleting Registrations .................................. 128
Next Regist Settings (Using more than
16 Registrations in one song)....................... 129
Recalling Recorded Registrations ......................... 131
Loading Registrations................................... 131
Playing Back a Song .............................................. 132
Playing Back the Selected Part(s) ................ 133
Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause................. 134
Changing the Tempo.................................... 134
Repeat Playback .......................................... 135
Playing Back XG Songs................................ 136
Song Copy/Delete/Convert, Folder Create/Delete . 137
Song Copy.................................................... 137
Song Delete/Folder Delete ........................... 139
Creating folders ............................................ 140
Converting ELB format songs to EL ............. 141
Converting EL format songs to ELB ............. 142
Converting to XG format ............................... 144
Checking the Remaining Memory ................ 145
7
8
9
Footswitches................................146
Left Footswitch....................................................... 146
Transpose and Pitch Controls....150
1
Quick Introductory
Guide
2
Voices
3
Voice Controls
and Effects
4
Rhythm/
Keyboard Percussion
5
Registration Memory
6
Music Data Recorder
(MDR)
7
Footswitches
8
Transpose and
Pitch Controls
9
Connections
Connections .................................151
Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................. 151
Connection Examples — External Devices ........... 153
Using Headphones ...................................... 153
Playing the Sounds of the Electone
Through an External Audio System .............. 153
Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an
External Recorder ........................................ 154
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the
Electone ....................................................... 154
Controlling the Electone from
an External Device ....................................... 155
Connecting USB storage devices ................ 155
Connection with Computer .................................... 156
Using the USB terminal ................................ 156
Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals ................. 157
MIDI ....................................................................... 157
What is MIDI? ............................................... 157
MIDI Messages of the Electone ................... 159
MIDI Channels.............................................. 160
MIDI Control........................................................... 161
10 Appendix ......................................163
Assembly Instructions............................................ 163
Installing Optional Hardware ................................. 167
Installing the Floppy Disk Drive.................... 167
MIDI Data Format................................................... 168
MIDI Implementation Chart .......................... 178
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 180
Specifications ........................................................ 182
Index ...................................................................... 183
10
Appendix
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
7
Main Features
Wide Variety of Registration Menus
page 14
The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 330 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six
basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit
your own performance needs.
Richly textured, AWM Voices and High Quality Digital Effects
pages 21, 52
The ELB-01 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—245 altogether—created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you
play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there
are wide variety of the effect types that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even
completely change the character of the Voices.
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment
page 56
The exceptionally wide selection of 133 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections)—such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and
Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and
professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing
basic backing as well as embellishments.
Keyboard Percussion
page 77
This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of
sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to
its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic
and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more.
Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder
page 107
The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances
to USB flash memory, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the
MDR allows you to copy a song from one USB flash memory device to another, letting you archive your
important recordings and Registration data. The Electone also allows you to convert the data format, letting
you play back songs that were recorded on other model Electones.
8
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Panel Layout
Overview
Music Rest
Upper Keyboard
USB TO DEVICE A terminal
Front Panel
Lower Keyboard
MIDI IN/OUT terminals
USB TO DEVICE B terminal
USB TO HOST terminal
Jacks
Right Footswitch
Speaker
Left Footswitch
Expression Pedal
Pedalboard
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
9
Front Panel
MUSIC DATA RECORDER (page 107)
Allows recording and playback of your
keyboard performances, and lets you
store Registration data for future recall
LEAD VOICE (page 21)
Selects the Lead Voices
for Upper Keyboard
LCD display (page 17)
Shows the current settings
of the Electone
PEDAL VOICE 1/2
(page 22)
Data Control [A] – [D]
buttons (page 17)
Selects the Voices
for Pedalboard
Selects the setting in the
display
[VOICE SECTION]
button (page 25)
Switches between Voice
sections 1 and 2
UPPER KEYBOARD
VOICE 1/2 (page 21)
Selects the Voices for
Upper Keyboard
LOWER KEYBOARD
VOICE 1/2 (page 22)
Selects the Voices for
Lower Keyboard
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION (page 77)
Turns Keyboard
Percussion On or Off
RHYTHM CONTROL
(page 59)
Starts and stops the
rhythm, and adds
changes to the rhythm
RHYTHM (page 56)
Sets the rhythm
TEMPO buttons
(page 61)
Adjusts the speed
of the rhythm
BAR/BEAT display (page 61)
Shows the current tempo or
position in the measure
REGISTRATION
MENU (page 14)
Set the registration
10
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
DATA CONTROL dial
(page 17)
REGISTRATION MEORY
buttons
Selects the setting in
the display
Records panel settings
made on the panel and LCD
PAGE buttons
(page 18)
Selects the Page
of the display
[M.] (Memory) button
(page 97)
[D.] (Disable) button
(page 99)
MASTER VOLUME
dial (page 13)
USB TO DEVICE A
terminal (page 151)
Allows communication
with USB flash memory
devices
POWER switch (page 12)
For turning the power on
or off.
Display Select
[VOICE DISPLAY] button (page 23)
[UTILITY] button (page 19)
[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button (page 71)
[FOOTSWITCH] button (page 146)
[RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button (page 75)
[SUSTAIN] button (page 49)
[ROTARY SP SPEED] button (page 50)
[REVERB] button (page 48)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
11
1 Quick Introductory Guide
Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in
your life, we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows
you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your Electone.
1
Quick Introductory Guide
1 Getting Started
1
Plug the power cord into an appropriate electrical outlet.
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone. The required voltage is
printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured
specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you intend
to use the instrument in another location, or if any doubt exists about the supply
voltage, please consult with a qualified technician.
2
Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch.
When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the
other on the LCD display:
Electone STãGEã
ELB-O1
¨”Strings1ΔViolin3
Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1
This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings
for each Voice section (page 23).
12
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of
the entire instrument.
Decreases the volume
4
1
Quick Introductory Guide
3
Increases the volume
Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.
Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can
use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play.
Maximum volume
Minimum volume
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
13
2 Registration Menu
1
NOTE
Quick Introductory Guide
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on
the Registration Memory
locations from 1 to 16. See
page 97 for details.
The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the
Electone settings for playing in specific music styles. A Registration consists of panel
settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal
Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Each Registration Menu button (1 – 5)
includes 48 “hidden” Registrations (90 Registrations for the [★] button), with each
Registration specially suited for playing in a different music style.
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
2
Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,
if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Menu, see page 15.
1
Kids
2
Pops & Rock
3
Dance & Ballad
4
Jazz & Latin
5
Symphony & World
★
Lesson
From this main category, select the specific Registration you
want to use.
Each Registration Menu button actually contains many hidden Registrations,
and only the currently selected Registration is shown in the display.
Select the hidden Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL
dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in
the reverse order.
¸˛˝<KIDS>
¿01:Simple 8Beat 1
3
14
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.
Registration Menu List
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Regist. Name
Simple 8Beat 1
Simple 8Beat 2
Light Step
Sunny Pop
Kids March 1
Kids March 2
Kids March 3
Synth. Rock
Symphon.March 1
Symphon.March 2
Bluegrass
Sea Carnival
Basic Waltz
Brass Ensemble
Pure Waltz
Rococo Ensemble
Pop Cha Cha
Comical Rumba
Comical Samba
Toy Orchestra
Charleston
Winter Swing
Snow Waltz 1
Snow Waltz 2
Alpine Polka *A
Alpine Polka *B
Alpine Polka *C
Alpine Polka *D
Dream Ballad *A
Dream Ballad *B
Dream Ballad *C
Dream Ballad *D
Pops Orches. *A
Pops Orches. *B
Pops Orches. *C
Pops Orches. *D
Kids On Stage*A
Kids On Stage*B
Kids On Stage*C
Kids On Stage*D
Galaxy March *A
Galaxy March *B
Galaxy March *C
Galaxy March *D
SE *A
SE *B
SE *C
SE *D
[2] POPS & ROCK
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Regist. Name
Dynamic 8Beat
NY Ballad
British Pop
8Beat Modern
Rock Band
Detroit Pop
Techno Pop
Sheriff Reggae
Rock&Roll
Power Rock
60's GuitarRock
Unplugged
Motor City
Lovely Shuffle
Gospel Shuffle
Joyful Gospel
Frankly Soul
Soul
Gospel
6/8 Soul
Hit Pop
New Country
Eternal Pop
Ground Beat
Bounce Pop *A
Bounce Pop *B
Bounce Pop *C
Bounce Pop *D
Blues Jam *A
Blues Jam *B
Blues Jam *C
Blues Jam *D
Evergre.Waltz*A
Evergre.Waltz*B
Evergre.Waltz*C
Evergre.Waltz*D
16Beat Pop *A
16Beat Pop *B
16Beat Pop *C
16Beat Pop *D
Top Gear Rock*A
Top Gear Rock*B
Top Gear Rock*C
Top Gear Rock*D
Southern Pop *A
Southern Pop *B
Southern Pop *C
Southern Pop *D
[3] DANCE & BALLAD
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Regist. Name
Organ Ballad
Dramatic Ballad
Love Ballad
Smooth Lead
Pop Ballad
Guitar Ballad
Acoustic Ballad
Healing Guitar
Chillout
Sweetheart 1
Sweetheart 2
Slow & Easy
Euro Trance
6/8 Trance
Cool Hip Hop
Latin House
Dance Beat
Euro Dance Pop
UK Pop
Jive
Disco Queen
Disco Soul
Pop Disco
Hot Disco
Ibiza *A
Ibiza *B
Ibiza *C
Ibiza *D
Power House *A
Power House *B
Power House *C
Power House *D
Dance Latino *A
Dance Latino *B
Dance Latino *C
Dance Latino *D
TwilightDisco*A
TwilightDisco*B
TwilightDisco*C
TwilightDisco*D
Love Song *A
Love Song *B
Love Song *C
Love Song *D
Movie Ballad *A
Movie Ballad *B
Movie Ballad *C
Movie Ballad *D
[4] JAZZ & LATIN
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1
Regist. Name
Blow On Sax
Sax Ensemble
Moonlight
Big Band
Clarinet Swing
Jazz Combo
Medium Jazz
Organ Session
Guitar Combo
Tender Ballad
Jazz Waltz
Five-Four
Big Band Samba
Mambo Brass
Mambo Tenor
Montuno
Bossa Nova
Pop Bossa
Sweet Rumba
Beguine
Cha Cha Cha
Mellow Groove
Modern R&B
Dixieland Jazz
Jungle Drum *A
Jungle Drum *B
Jungle Drum *C
Jungle Drum *D
Jazz Club *A
Jazz Club *B
Jazz Club *C
Jazz Club *D
Afro Session *A
Afro Session *B
Afro Session *C
Afro Session *D
ChaChaGrandee*A
ChaChaGrandee*B
ChaChaGrandee*C
ChaChaGrandee*D
3/4 FastJazz *A
3/4 FastJazz *B
3/4 FastJazz *C
3/4 FastJazz *D
Twilight Sax *A
Twilight Sax *B
Twilight Sax *C
Twilight Sax *D
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Quick Introductory Guide
[1] KIDS
15
[5] SYMPHONY & WORLD
1
Quick Introductory Guide
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
16
Regist. Name
Fanfare
StringOrchestra
Romantic Violin
Baroque
Flute&Harp
Serenade
Fast March
Wild West
Vienna Waltz
Polka
Chanson Club
Theatre Organ
Flamenco
Pop Flamenco
Mexican Dance
Mariachi
Celtic Dance
Folk Step
Italiano
Musette
Country
Hawaiian
ChineseNocturne
Japanese Sound
Orches.March *A
Orches.March *B
Orches.March *C
Orches.March *D
Pasodoble *A
Pasodoble *B
Pasodoble *C
Pasodoble *D
Tango *A
Tango *B
Tango *C
Tango *D
Show Time *A
Show Time *B
Show Time *C
Show Time *D
Majes. Sound *A
Majes. Sound *B
Majes. Sound *C
Majes. Sound *D
Orches.Swing *A
Orches.Swing *B
Orches.Swing *C
Orches.Swing *D
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
[★] LESSON
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Regist. Name
Simple 1 St/St
Simple 2 St/Hr
Simple 3 Cl/St
Simple 4 Cl/Hr
Simple 5 Tp/St
Simple 6 Tp/Hr
Simple 7 Ob/St
Simple 8 Ob/Bsn
Simple 9 Fl/St
Simple 10 Fl/Cl
Simple 11 Cl/Cl
Simple 12 Pf/Pf
Sound Effect 1
Sound Effect 2
Sound Effect 3
Sound Effect 4
Sound Effect 5
Sound Effect 6
Sound Effect 7
Sound Effect 8
Sound Effect 9
Sound Effect 10
Sound Effect 11
Sound Effect 12
Sound Effect 13
Sound Effect 14
Sound Effect 15
Sound Effect 16
Strings Combi.1
Strings Combi.2
Strings Combi.3
Strings Combi.4
Strings Combi.5
Strings Combi.6
Strings Combi.7
Strings Combi.8
Strings Combi.9
StringsCombi.10
StringsCombi.11
StringsCombi.12
StringsCombi.13
StringsCombi.14
StringsCombi.15
Brass Combi. 1
Brass Combi. 2
Brass Combi. 3
Brass Combi. 4
Brass Combi. 5
No.
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
Regist. Name
Brass Combi. 6
Brass Combi. 7
Brass Combi. 8
W.Wind Combi. 1
W.Wind Combi. 2
W.Wind Combi. 3
W.Wind Combi. 4
W.Wind Combi. 5
W.Wind Combi. 6
W.Wind Combi. 7
W.Wind Combi. 8
W.Wind Combi. 9
W.Wind Combi.10
W.Wind Combi.11
W.Wind Combi.12
W.Wind Combi.13
W.Wind Combi.14
W.Wind Combi.15
W.Wind Combi.16
W.Wind Combi.17
Decay 1
Decay 2
Decay 3
Decay 4
Decay 5
Decay 6
Decay 7
Sustained 1
Sustained 2
Sustained 3
Sustained 4
Synth. 1
Synth. 2
Synth. 3
Synth. 4
Synth. 5
Comping 1
Comping 2
Comping 3
Comping 4
Comping 5
Comping 6
3 Using the LCD display
Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button on
the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding button in
the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently perform
various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons (located at
either side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at the right of the LCD).
Quick Introductory Guide
1
LCD Display and LCD Buttons
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The functions of the [A] – [D] buttons differ depending on the selected display. Keep
in mind that three types of indicators are used with the functions and parameters: a
flashing indicator (¿ or ÷) a continuously lit indicator (¿ or ÷) and a square on/off
indicator (” or ’).
1
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿GLIDE
TIME÷1 ⁄
”LEAD
2
1
3
Flashing indicator (¿ or ÷)
When the indicator at an item is flashing, you can directly select the item or parameter
(in this case, “Time”) by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. (When the
final item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap
around” to the first item.) Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise
selects in the reverse order. (Similarly, when the first item is reached, turning the DATA
CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around” to the last item.) Also, you can
change the desired value/setting by successively pressing the corresponding [A] –[D]
button (in this case, the [B] button). The value or setting changes (in steps) each time
the button is pressed.
2
Continuously lit indicator (¿ or ÷)
This indicates that the corresponding item/parameter is not currently selected for
change. When the ¿/÷ indicator at an item is continuously lit, pressing the
corresponding [A] – [D] button (in this case, the [C] button, corresponding to the
Mode setting) switches to a flashing indicator, letting you change value/setting with the
DATA CONTROL dial. Also, you can change the desired value/setting by successively
pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in this case, the [C] button).
3
On/off indicator (” or ’)
A solid square (”) next to an item indicates that the corresponding function (in this
case, “Lead”) is on.
A hollow square (’) indicates that the function is off. Pressing the [A] – [D] button
corresponding to the desired item or parameter (in this case, the [D] button) alternates
between On and Off.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
17
Changing the Display Page
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿GLIDE
TIME÷1 ⁄
”LEAD
Quick Introductory Guide
PAGE buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available), with
the currently selected page number appearing in highlight at the top right of the LCD.
Use the PAGE [▲] button to select the next page, and PAGE [▼] to select the previous
page.
Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1.
Selecting a Voice or Rhythm
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
Press the desired Voice/Rhythm button on the panel (in this
example, the [STRINGS] button in Upper Keyboard Voice 1).
Contains various
Strings Voices
<STRINGS/VIOLIN>
¿01:Strings 1
¨1
Indicates currently selected Voice
The selected Voice/Rhythm is shown in the display.
2
Select the desired Voice/Rhythm by turning the DATA CONTROL
dial.
<STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1
¿08:Pizzicato Strs 1
When the final item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise
does not “wrap around” to the first item. Similarly, when the first item is
reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around”
to the last item.
18
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Selecting from a recommended set of Voices/Rhythms
The Electone has a huge amount of available Voices and Rhythms—so many that it
may be difficult to find the ones you want. To help you find the best Voice/Rhythm
for the selected instrument category, we’ve prepared some “recommended” or
popular selections in that category. Simply press the [A], [B] or [D] button while
the Voice/Rhythm menu is displayed to call up one of the recommended selections.
Quick Introductory Guide
1
<STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1
¿13:Strings&Violin
4 Basic Operation
Selecting the Display Language
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default
setting is English.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel.
The Utility display appears. The language can be set in the Utility display Page 1.
<æy∫/LANGUAGE>
⁄
’i-y∫
”ENGLISH
2
Press the [C] or [D] button to select the corresponding language:
[C] for Japanese, or [D] for English.
<æy∫/LANGUAGE>
⁄
’i-y∫
”ENGLISH
NOTE
The Language setting is not
actually set for the
instrument until you switch
to another display. Make
sure to switch to another
display before turning the
power off.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
19
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Reference Page
1
Storing Registrations
(page 97)
All current settings including Registration Memory and LCD Display settings can be
deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set,
since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to external media,
such as a USB flash memory.
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Turn off the power.
2
While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back
on.
3
Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears.
Confirming the Version of Your Electone
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
2
Select Page 7 by using the PAGE buttons.
The Version appears in the display.
VERSIONx.xx
20
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
‡
2 Voices
This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on
the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to three Voice sections are
available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard
and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.
Voices
2
1 Voices for each keyboard
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to three different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing
together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2 and Lead Voice. Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from the panel’s Upper
Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, while the Lead Voice is selected from the Lead Voice
section.
Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 29)
Reference Page
Selecting Voices for Voice
Section 2 (page 30)
Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1
and Upper Keyboard 2
Voices for the Lead Voice
The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys
are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such as
Trumpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or highest part in an
orchestra or band.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
21
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing
together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section
can be selected from the panel’s Lower Keyboard Voice 1/2 section.
2
Voices
Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1
and Lower Keyboard 2
Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together:
Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s
Pedal Voice 1/2 section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a time; when you
simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound.
Voices for the Pedal Voice 1
and Pedal Voice 2
22
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
2 Voice Display
The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each
keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not by
changing the On/Off status in the display.
Reference Page
On/Off status of Voices
(page 28)
2
How to call up the Voice Display:
Voices
Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section selects the Voice
Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.)
¨”Strings1ΔViolin3
Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1
Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1
and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to first select the desired Voice section.
For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for checking
the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2. To switch
between the Voice sections, press the [VOICE SECTION] button at the top left on the
panel.
Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION] button at the top left on the panel
alternate between the two displays.
Reference Page
Voices for each keyboard
(page 21)
Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 29)
Selected Voice section number’s lamp is lit
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
23
When the Voice section [1] lights up
Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Lead Voice
¨”Strings1ΔViolin3
Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1
2
Voices
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Pedal Voice 1
From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1 on
each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1).
The Lead Voice, which only has one section, is shown only in the Voice section 1
display.
When the Voice section [2] lights up
Upper Keyboard Voice 2
¨”Piano1
Ò”Strings1∏”ContBs1
Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Pedal Voice 2
From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2 on
each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2).
The Lead Voice is not shown in this display.
24
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
3 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections
(except Lead Voice), instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice
section 1 are given here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page
30.
Voices
1
2
Make sure that the lamp of the Voice section [1] is lit.
If the Voice section [2] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button
so that Voice section [1] lights.
Indicates that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1
(in this case, Upper Keyboard Voice 1)
When the Voice section [1] lamp is lit, you can select a Voice for Voice section 1
(in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s Upper Keyboard
Voice 1/2 section.
The Lead Voice can be selected regardless of whether Voice section [1] or Voice
section [2] is lit.
2
Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 29)
Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2
section.
For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display
(Voice Menu) will appear.
<ORGAN>
¿01:Pipe Organ 1
¨1
HINT
You can select the ideal
Voice by simply pressing the
[A]/ [B]/ [D] buttons when
the Voice menu is displayed.
Each Voice button has so
many Voices that this
function helps you selecting
the Voices.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
25
The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and only the currently selected
Organ Voice appears in the display.
3
2
Select the Voice in the Voice Menu display.
You can select other “hidden” Organ Voices in sequence by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counterclockwise selects in the reverse order.
Voices
<ORGAN>
¿03:Pipe Organ 3
¨1
Here we’ve selected Pipe Organ 3 for Upper Keyboard Voice 1.
You can also select other Voices in the Voice Menu display by pressing the [C]
button (once or repeatedly). Each press of the [C] button selects another hidden
Voice. If you press the [C] button when the last voice is shown, selection “wraps
around” back to the first voice.
Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the
Upper keyboard above.
Adjusting the Voice volume
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel
and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse
adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you fine control.
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
level for each Voice. The controls have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or
no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Increasing the volume
Decreasing the volume
26
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Setting the Volume in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up the
Voice Condition display. The Volume is displayed in the top left of the Voice
Condition display Page 1. You can change the Volume by using the DATA
CONTROL dial when the arrow indicator (“¿” or “÷”) next to the Volume value is
flashing. If the arrow indicator is not flashing, press one of the [A] – [D] buttons
corresponding to the item or parameter you want to change to make the indicator
flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired control setting.
The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24.
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set in the display),
two adjacent Volume button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
2
Reference Page
Voices
Selecting from the Voice
Condition display (page 41)
Voice Condition Display
VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄
TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected
button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive
presses alternate between the two displays.
Voice Menu Display
<STRINGS/VIOLIN>
¿01:Strings 1
Voice Condition Display
¨1
VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄
TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET
From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as
Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition
display, see page 41.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
27
On/Off status of Voices
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can set the whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the On/Off status in the
Voice display. To call up the Voice display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.
Reference Page
Voice Display (page 23)
2
Voices
Voice Display (Voice section [1] lit)
Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Lead Voice
¨”Strings1ΔViolin3
Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Pedal Voice 1
Two different displays are available, depending on whether Voice section 1 or Voice
section 2 is lit. The instructions below use Voice section 1 as an example; however, the
method for changing the On/Off setting is same in both Voice section 1 and Voice
section 2.
On/Off settings:
Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the items or parameters you want to
change to alternate between On and Off. Selecting Off effectively mutes the sound of
the corresponding Voice, even when the keys are played.
¨’Strings1ΔViolin3
Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1
Setting this to Off results in a Volume value of 0. If you increase the Volume by using
the Volume buttons, the On/Off status here changes to On.
The On/Off status for other Voices can be set in the other Voice Displays.
28
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
3 Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2
This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different Voice
in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound, playing the two
Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice section 1, see page 25.
The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice (Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for
Voice section 2.
2
Voices
Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION]
button on the panel.
For the Voice section which is indicated as “xxx Voice 1/2” (Voice section name is
written in xxx) on the panel, you can select the Voice from each section by switching
between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the [VOICE SECTION] button.
NOTE
Switching between Voice
sections 1 and 2 has no
effect on which Voice is
sounded by the keyboard.
[VOICE SECTION] button
Each press of the [VOICE SECTION] button alternates between the available Voice
sections 1 and 2. The lamp of the selected (available) Voice section number lights up.
When Voice section [1] is lit
Since the Voice section 1 is selected,
you can select the Upper Keyboard
Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and
Pedal Voice 1.
When Voice section [2] is lit
Since the Voice section 2 is selected,
you can select the Upper Keyboard
Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and
Pedal Voice 2.
Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Lead Voice
Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Pedal Voice 1
Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Pedal Voice 2
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
29
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout all
Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard Voice
2, are given here.
1
2
Make sure that the lamp of Voice section [2] is lit.
If the Voice section [1] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button
so that Voice section [2] lights.
Voices
Indicates that you can select a Voice for Voice section 2
(in this case, Upper Keyboard Voice 2)
2
Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2
section.
NOTE
Indicates Upper Keyboard
Voice 2 is selected.
Once calling up the Voice
Menu display, it has no
change even when you
switch the Voice section 1 or
2.
<PERCUSSION>
¿01:Vibraphone 1
3
Select the Voices you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL
dial.
<PERCUSSION>
¿03:Marimba
30
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
¨2
¨2
4
Press one of the Volume buttons of the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2
section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2.
Voices
2
Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 will produce no
sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To play the Voices for
Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of the selected Voice 1/2
section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When the lamp of the Voice
section [2] is lit, the Volume buttons of the Voice sections (except the Lead
Voice) can be used to set the Volume level specifically for Voice section 2.
Now set the Voices for Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you did for Upper
keyboard Voice 2 above.
If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to minimum
by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel, or select the
Off status in the Voice Display when the lamp of the Voice section [2] is lit.
Reference Page
On/Off status of Voices
(page 28)
About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also
be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each section is
on.
Keep in mind that when [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice
cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. Also, Initial
Touch is not effective on Pedal Voices played on the Lower Keyboard.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
31
4 Selecting Voices from the User buttons
This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what is
immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in
“Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that are
available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.
The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even
more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any
internal voices can be selected from these buttons.
2
Voices
User buttons
The User buttons have two basic uses:
• For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard.
You can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from the sixteen Voice
Menu pages (including the four Voice Menu pages of the Pedal Voice section), and
not be limited to only the twelve buttons (equivalent to twelve Voice Menu pages)
that make up the Upper Voice section.
• For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for
selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User
button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User
button in the same section.
For example, select Bell Pad 3 for User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1.
1
32
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Make sure that the lamp of Voice section [1] is lit.
If the Voice section [2] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button
so that Voice section [1] lights.
2
Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections.
The name of the selected category (Woodwind/Flute) is displayed.
Voices
2
<WOODWIND/FLUTE>¨1 ›
¿17:Alto Sax 1
3
Select one of the sixteen Pages (categories) with the PAGE
buttons (in this case, “Pad,” Page 7).
Currently selected Page
<PAD>
¨1 ‡
¿01:Smooth Pad 1
Directly selecting the category
To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and
simultaneously press the desired Voice button.
1. While holding down the User button...
2. Press the Voice button.
4
Select Bell Pad 3 by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Now you’ve assigned Bell Pad 3 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice
sections just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above.
<PAD>
¿12:Bell Pad 3
¨1 ‡
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
33
6 Voice List
The letters A, B and D printed at the right side of each Voice name in this list indicate the corresponding DATA
CONTROL button’s name. Pressing that button selects the corresponding Voice.
Category
2
STRINGS/VIOLIN
Voices
CONTRABASS
BRASS/TRUMPET
34
Voice Name
Description
01
Strings 1
02
Strings 2
03
Strings 3
04
Strings 4
05
Strings 5
06
Chamber Strs 1
07
Chamber Strs 2
08
Pizzicato Strs 1
09
Pizzicato Strs 2
10
Tremolo Strings
Tremolo strings.
11
Strings1&5
Combination of Strings 1 and Strings 5.
12
Strings&Viola
13
Strings&Violin
14
Violin&Cello
String ensemble consisting of Violin 3 and Cello.
15
Octave Strings
Strings ensemble sound with octave unison voices playable from a single key.
16
Violin 1
17
Violin 2
18
Violin 3
19
Viola
Slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. Used for mid-range parts.
20
Cello
Warm and deep sounds.
21
Pizzicato Violin
Violin sound played by plucking.
01
Contrabass 1
02
Contrabass 2
03
Contrabass 3
04
These voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string
instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking
sounds, bow scratching noises and deep resonant sounds.
Strings ensemble for chamber music.
A
The sound of stringed instruments being plucked instead of bowed.
Combination of Strings 2 and Viola.
B
D
Combination of Strings 5 and Violin 3 with deep vibrato.
Deeply expressive sounds, suitable not only for classical music but also jazz and country &
western. Tonal variations include bright voices and soft ones.
A
Used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds.
Acoustic Bass
B
Acoustic bass sound ideal for jazz. This instrument goes by many different names, including
“standup bass” and “upright bass.”
05
Pizzicato Bass
D
Contrabass sound played by plucking.
01
Brass Section 1
02
Brass Section 2
03
Brass Section 3
04
Brass Section 4
05
Trombone Sec 1
06
Trombone Sec 2
07
Brass&Trp 1
08
Brass&Trp 2
Combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 4.
09
Horn 1&3
Combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3.
10
Octave Brass 1
11
Octave Brass 2
Octave brass with variations. Features rich variations from strong, dynamic impact voices
with quick attack, to soft, warm voices that enrich the overall sound.
12
Octave Brass 3
13
Octave Brass 4
14
Trumpet 1
15
Trumpet 2
16
Trumpet 3
17
Trumpet 4
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
A
Trumpet-based brass section. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and other
music.
Trombone brass section. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a sweet,
smooth sound for jazz ballads.
Combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 4.
B
Bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds.
WOODWIND/
FLUTE
Voice Name
Description
18
Muted Trumpet
This recreates the distinctive sound that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet.
The normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and
metallic.
19
Flugel Horn
A brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound.
20
Trombone 1
21
Trombone 2
The slide trombone has a distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” sound and features a wide
range of expressional power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet.
22
Trombone 3
23
Muted Trombone
24
Horn 1
25
Horn 2
26
Horn 3
27
Horn 4
28
Muted Horn
This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable
of mimicking the sound of a human voice.
29
Tuba
This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that
supports brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in
playing humorous phrases.
30
Euphonium
Features a characteristically broad and deep—even noble—sound, and is frequently used as
a solo instrument.
31
Brass Bass 1
32
Brass Bass 2
Brass ensemble for playing in the lower octaves. Brass Bass 2 also has a timpani sound in
unison.
01
Flute 1
02
Flute 2
03
Flute 3
04
Piccolo
This instrument is one octave higher than flute and is meant to be played in the higher
octaves.
05
Recorder
This basic flute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some
medieval and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound.
06
Ocarina
This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the
sound quality are changed by the strength of the breath.
07
Whistle
08
Clarinet 1
09
Clarinet 2
10
Clarinet 3
11
Bass Clarinet
12
Oboe 1
13
Oboe 2
14
English Horn
Also known as “cor anglais,” this is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited to
performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces.
15
Bassoon 1
16
Bassoon 2
This belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its
humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used
as a solo instrument. It is also called “fagott,” from the German word meaning “bundle of
sticks.”
17
Alto Sax 1
18
Alto Sax 2
19
Tenor Sax 1
20
Tenor Sax 2
21
Soprano Sax 1
22
Baritone Sax
Soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music.
23
Sax Ens 1
24
Sax Ens 2
Saxophone ensemble with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical and sax section for
big band.
25
Woodwind Ens 1
26
Woodwind Ens 2
2
A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone voice.
D
A
These voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound.
The voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with
virtually any instrument sound, woodwind or brass.
Voices
Category
BRASS/TRUMPET
A light and transparent instrument voice that sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is
equally good for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies.
Recreation of a human whistling sound.
B
This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character—with rich sound in the low
end and crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles
including classical chamber music and swing jazz.
This instrument has a thick, deep voice and is played one octave lower than the normal
clarinet.
D
An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal
tone—yet it is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion.
Among the woodwind instruments, this is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly
prominent role. Its wide expressional power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz.
This voice is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in
soul and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces.
Features a characteristic high, ‘stretching’ sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet,
emotional passages.
Woodwind ensemble sound that varies the instrument depending on the register played.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
35
Category
TUTTI
2
CHOIR
Voices
PAD
SYNTH
36
Voice Name
Description
01
Strings&Winds
A
Unison strings and woodwind ensemble.
02
03
Strings&Brass
B
Unison strings and brass ensemble.
Strings&Horn
D
Strings and horn ensemble.
04
Brass&Sax 1
05
Brass&Sax 2
06
Brass&Winds
Brass and woodwind tutti.
07
Orchestra Hit
A popular, widely used sampled sound in which the many instruments of the orchestra play
together on one chord or note. Used for dramatic hits and accents.
Vocal chorus sound. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs.
Brass and sax tutti.
01
Choir 1
02
Choir 2
03
Choir 3
A
04
Choir 4
B
05
Choir 5
D
06
Choir 6
07
Vocal
01
Smooth Pad 1
02
Smooth Pad 2
03
Smooth Pad 3
04
Smooth Pad 4
05
Resonance Pad 1
06
Resonance Pad 2
07
Resonance Pad 3
08
Resonance Pad 4
09
Resonance Pad 5
10
Bell Pad 1
11
Bell Pad 2
12
Bell Pad 3
13
Bell Pad 4
14
Bell Pad 5
15
Space Pad 1
16
Space Pad 2
17
Space Pad 3
18
Space Pad 4
19
Noisy Pad 1
20
Noisy Pad 2
21
Noisy Pad 3
22
Noisy Pad 4
01
Synth Lead 1
02
Synth Lead 2
03
Synth Lead 3
04
Synth Lead 4
05
Synth Lead 5
06
Synth Lead 6
07
Pop Lead 1
08
Pop Lead 2
09
Pop Lead 3
10
Pop Lead 4
11
Pop Lead 5
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Solo human voice singing “ahh.”
A
These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help
support the other voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds.
These voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads,
and feature sweeping filter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held.
B
D
These continuous pad voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of voices
here—including an initial bell sound, as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously.
This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound.
Bright, buzzy continuous synth sound with soft pad.
A
These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth
voice that has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch.
A light and round synth sound, appropriate for solos and leads.
ORGAN
PIANO
Voice Name
12
Synth Cla 1
13
Synth Cla 2
14
Synth Cla 3
15
Synth Cla 4
16
Synth Brass 1
17
Synth Brass 2
18
Synth Brass 3
19
Synth Brass 4
20
Synth Brass 5
21
Synth Brass 6
22
Synth Strs 1
23
Synth Strs 2
24
Synth Strs 3
25
Synth Strs 4
26
Synth Bell 1
27
Synth Bell 2
28
Synth Bell 3
29
Synth Bell 4
30
Synth Decay
Description
A bright, round and fresh synth sound, reminiscent of the clarinet.
B
An abundant variety of synth brass voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to
unique, comical sounds.
2
Voices
Category
SYNTH
Spacious synth strings sound.
Synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds.
D
Unique decaying synth sound.
01
Pipe Organ 1
02
Pipe Organ 2
A
The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich,
majestic sound. The voices here range from soft to powerful.
03
Pipe Organ 3
04
Harmonica 1
B
This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads
and solos.
05
Harmonica 2
06
Theatre Organ 1
07
Theatre Organ 2
08
Accordion 1
09
Accordion 2
10
Bandoneon
This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack.
11
Reed Organ
This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound.
12
Jazz Organ 1
13
Jazz Organ 2
These electric organ sounds—great for jazz and R&B—are designed to be used with the rich
rotary speaker effect.
14
Jazz Organ 3
15
Pop Organ 1
16
Pop Organ 2
17
Pop Organ 3
18
Rock Organ 1
19
Rock Organ 2
20
Organ Bass 1
21
Organ Bass 2
22
Organ Bass 3
23
Organ Bass 4
01
Piano 1
02
Piano 2
03
Honkytonk Piano
04
Harpsichord
This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie
theaters, skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums.
D
A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including
French chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music.
Multi-purpose organ sounds.
Hard, overdriven, distorted organ sound, ideal for rock.
Pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds for lower register parts.
A
Multi-purpose piano sounds.
Purposely out-of-tune piano sound, used in ragtime, older jazz and blues and country rock
music.
B
The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is
no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are
released.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
37
Category
PIANO
2
Voices
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
TIMPANI
ELECTRIC BASS
38
Voice Name
Description
05
Clavichord
Soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with unique sound when keys are released.
06
DX E.Piano 1
07
DX E.Piano 2
08
Stage E.Piano 1
09
Stage E.Piano 2
10
Stage E.Piano 3
11
Stage E.Piano 4
12
Stack E.Piano
This bright electric piano is characterized by its sharp attack sound.
13
Clavi 1
Funky clavi.
14
Clavi 2
01
Nylon Guitar
02
Steel Guitar
Acoustic guitar. Steel string.
03
12Str Guitar
12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.
04
Jazz Guitar
05
Harp 1
06
Harp 2
07
Elec Guitar 1
08
Elec Guitar 2
09
Elec Guitar 3
10
Muted Guitar
Muted guitar.
11
Distortion Gtr 1
Distorted guitar.
12
Distortion Gtr 2
13
Banjo
For country and dixieland jazz.
14
Mandolin
This instrument is used in much Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound.
15
Pedal Steel Gtr
Hawaiian guitar. Effective when used with the glide function.
D
Electric piano sounds from the popular DX-7 synthesizer.
These electric piano voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright
yet warm feel. The #2 sound also has a tremolo effect.
A
Acoustic guitar. Nylon string.
This soft electric guitar is good for jazz solo passages.
B
The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and is often
played glissando for dramatic effect.
D
These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric
guitar with realistic decay.
01
Vibraphone 1
02
Vibraphone 2
03
Marimba
04
Xylophone
Dry and tight sounds.
05
Glockenspiel 1
This is the sound of a small glockenspiel, and features a soft, shining sound.
06
Glockenspiel 2
07
Celesta
The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to
the glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound.
08
Music Box
Music box
09
Chime 1
Chime
10
Chime 2
01
Timpani
02
Timpani Roll
01
Fingered Bass 1
02
Fingered Bass 2
03
Fingered Bass 3
04
Slap Bass 1
05
Slap Bass 2
06
Slap Bass 3
07
Picked Bass 1
08
Picked Bass 2
09
Fretless Bass
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
A
This percussion instrument utilizes resonators fitted with metal discs, which in turn are
connected by rod to a motor—which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in
some jazz music.
B
This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates.
However, the wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich
lower register-giving it a wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument.
D
A
B/D
This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a
definite pitch. It adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other
instruments and plays a very important role in orchestral music.
Timpani played with a drum roll technique.
A
Electric bass played with fingers.
B
Percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass voices feature variations in the
‘thickness’ of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played.
D
These electric bass voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have
variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds.
Smooth fretless bass. This fretless bass voice has a unique sound, and is best used with
subtle, sliding pitch changes.
WORLD
Voice Name
Description
01
Funk Bass 1
A
Synth bass suitable for rock and blues.
02
Funk Bass 2
03
Funk Bass 3
04
Dance Bass 1
05
Dance Bass 2
B
Synth bass suitable for dance music.
06
Smooth Bass 1
07
Smooth Bass 2
08
Smooth Bass 3
01
Pan Flute
02
Bagpipe
A traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can
be melancholy as well dramatic and inspiring.
03
Dulcimer
A characteristically clear and beautiful voice.
04
Shakuhachi
Traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo.
05
Yokobue
Traditional Japanese flute.
06
Shamisen
07
Koto
08
Taishokoto
09
Erhu
10
Sheng
The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and
apparently inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ.
11
Pipa
A Chinese lute with a pear-shaped body, it is used often for solo parts as well as
accompaniment and ensemble.
12
Sitar
Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument with different resonances in the lower and mid/
high ranges.
13
Steel Drum
This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from
55-gallon oil drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th
century. It has a bright and joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source.
14
Kalimba
African instrument.
Contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds.
2
D
A
B
The panflute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various
countries, and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one
line. It is a beautiful instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the
Greek mythological god Pan.
Voices
Category
SYNTH BASS
This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with
animal skin. The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong
Oriental flavor.
Japanese Koto.
Japanese Taisho Koto.
D
Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of
producing sad, mysterious, or joyful melodies.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
39
3 Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the
sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the
controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice
sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied
differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section,
independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
Controls and Effects
Reference
page for
changing
the settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard
Lead Voice
Lower Keyboard
Pedal board
Upper Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Lead Voice
Lower Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Pedal board
Voice 1, 2
Volume
page 42
O
O
O
O
Reverb (send level)
page 42
O
O
O
O
Initial Touch
page 42
O
O
O
–
Feet
page 42
O
O
O
O
Pan
page 43
O
O
O
O
Tune
page 43
O
O
O
O
Transpose
page 43
O
O
O
O
Vibrato
page 44
O
O
O
O
Reverb
page 45
O
O
O
O
Delay
page 45
O
O
O
O
Karaoke
page 45
O
O
O
O
Chorus
page 45
O
O
O
O
Flanger
page 45
O
O
O
O
Phaser
page 45
O
O
O
O
Tremolo/Auto Pan
page 45
O
O
O
O
Rotary Speaker
page 45
O
O
O
O
Distortion
page 45
O
O
O
O
Wah
page 45
O
O
O
O
Dynamic
page 45
O
O
O
O
EQ/Enhancer
page 45
O
O
O
O
Slide
page 47
–
O
–
–
Reverb
page 48
Sustain
page 49
O
–
O
O
Rotary Speaker
page 50
O
O
O
O
Selecting from the Voice Condition display, Pages 1-6
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page
4/5
Selecting from
the panel
Page 6
40
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
O
1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display
To call up the Voice Condition display:
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice
Condition display appears.
Voice Condition Display
Voice Controls and Effects
3
Currently selected page
VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄
TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET
Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) is consists of five display
pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages.
Setting and adjusting the parameters
You can change the items or parameters when the arrow indicator “¿(÷)” in the
display is flashing. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the items or
parameters you want to change to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired control setting.
With the indicator flashing, you can also directly change the items or parameters by
using the DATA CONTROL dial. For details, see “Using the LCD display” on
page 17.
NOTE
After pressing one of the [A]
– [D] buttons (to make the
indicator flash), you can
continue pressing the same
button to change the item or
parameter.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
41
Voice Condition [Page 1]
1
2
VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄
TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET
3
4
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch
sensitivity and volume.
The items included in this page differ between the Pedal Voice sections and the other
sections. Initial Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
1
Volume
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 26 for more information.
2
Reference Page
Reverb (page 48)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section.
When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the
setting here will have no effect. See page 48 for details.
Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
3
NOTE
Initial Touch may not be
effective on some Voices,
such as Organ Voices.
Reverb
Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The
harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will
become.
Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no effect. This
function is not applied to the Pedal Voices.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 14
4
Feet
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide
register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
42
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Voice Condition [Page 2]
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.
1
PAN ¿C
TUNE¿ 0
2
1
¨1¤
TRANSP.÷ 0
3
3
Panning
Voice Controls and Effects
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Range: L3 – C – R3
2
Tune
Determines the fine pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer,
richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
(page 150)
Range: -64 – +63
3
Transpose
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
instrument); (page 150)
Range: -6 – +6
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
43
Voice Condition [Page 3]
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.
1
VIB¿PRESET
¨1‹
Vibrato
The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and
more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
Voice Controls and Effects
1
Preset/User
Vibrato Control
Speed
Each press of the [A] button toggles
Delay
between Preset and User.
Selecting Preset calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When Preset is selected, the Delay, Depth
and Speed parameters cannot be edited.
Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself.
1
Depth
3
2
VIB¿USER DEPTH÷ 0¨1‹
DELAY¿ 0 SPEED÷ 0
3
2
4
Depth
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more
pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 14
3
Delay
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and
the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato
onset.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 14
4
Speed
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of
the vibrato.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 14
44
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Voice Condition [Page 4]
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 4.
EFFECT¿PRESET
EFFECT¿REVERB
EFFECT¿EQ/ENHANCE
EFFECT¿THRU
EFFECT¿PRESET
TYPE¿01:THRU
3
¨1›
Voice Controls and Effects
1
2
Effect
You can select the effects applied to each Voice section.
1
Effect Category
You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section.
Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then you can select the
Effect Categories in sequence: Preset → Reverb → Delay → ... → Dynamic →
EQ/Enhancer → Thru by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse
order.
PRESET
The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently
selected sound is automatically selected.
REVERB
Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the
subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms.
DELAY
Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also
useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound.
KARAOKE
Produces a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing-along
applications.
CHORUS
Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at
once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated.
FLANGER
This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but
with a brighter more resonant sound.
PHASER
Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a
pronounced up/down filter sweep effect.
TREMOLO/
AUTO PAN
This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the
sound image both front and back, and left and right.
ROTARY
SPEAKER
This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates
the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn.
DISTORTION
This effect adds distortion to the sound.
WAH
This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the
sound, producing a “wah-wah” sound.
DYNAMIC
This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic
range of the sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft
sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound.
EQ/ENHANCER
EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency
ranges in the sound, and affects the overall sound quality.
Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the
high frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound
brighter, but giving it more clarity and presence.
THRU
Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
45
When Preset is selected, the original (factory) effect category for the selected
Voice is automatically set. Selecting Thru bypasses the effect (no effect is added
to the selected Voice).
Reference Page
Effect List (page 52)
2
Effect Type
Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Voice Condition [Page 5]
3
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 5.
Currently selected Effect Type
Voice Controls and Effects
TYPE:Hall 1
¿Time
Time
Dry/Wet
¨1fi
÷2.1s
÷2.1s
÷D24>W
Effect Parameters
You can set the parameters of effect type selected in the Voice Condition display, Page 4.
Generally, the effect parameters settings are automatically well-balanced to the selected
effect type, so there is no need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the
setting.
If you want to change the setting, select the parameter, then change the value. Since
selection of Parameters and setting of value follow the same procedure throughout all
Effect Type, instructions for only “Hall 1” of Reverb are given here.
For details, see page 52.
TYPE:Hall 1
¿Time
1
1
¨1fi
÷2.1s
2
Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.Press
the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to select the parameters. In this case, the Time parameter is selected.
2 Value
setting
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
46
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice)
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 6.
1
’SLIDE
SLIDE TIME¿ 0
Î fl
2
In this Page, determines whether or not the Slide function is applied to the Lead Voice.
3
Slide
1
Voice Controls and Effects
Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective
within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice.
Slide On/Off
Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect.
Each press of the [A] button toggles between On and Off.
2
Slide Time
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the
slower the speed.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 14
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
47
2 Selecting from the panel
The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the
respective buttons on the panel.
Reverb
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in
a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice section or
the entire system. Also, you can adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and
accompaniment separately.
Call up the Reverb display to set the Reverb effect by pressing the [REVERB] button
on the panel.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
Reference Pages
Changing the rhythm
volume/reverb (page 62)
Reverb (page 42)
Each press of the [REVERB] button toggles between On and Off. When set to On, the
lamp of the button lights up to indicate that Reverb is on.
Reverb Display
2
<REVERB>
¿XG HALL 1
1
DEPTH÷ 0
TIM÷ 2.1
3
1 Type
Selects the Reverb Type.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
2
Depth
Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. This allows
fine control over the depth. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in
Voice Condition display, Page 2 (page 43) have no effect.
Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 - 24
3 Time
Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections.
Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
48
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Sustain
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to
gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length
settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.
Call up the Sustain display to set the Sustain effect by pressing the [SUSTAIN] button
on the panel.
3
<SUSTAIN>
’LOWER¿10
Voice Controls and Effects
Sustain Display
’UPPER÷10
’PEDAL÷ 6
Sustain On/Off
For Upper Voices, press the corresponding [B] button to toggle between On and Off.
For Lower Voices, press the corresponding [C] button to toggle between On and Off.
For Pedal Voices, press the corresponding [D] button to toggle between On and Off.
Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead Voices.
The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for
one of the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices in the Sustain display. When you turn off the
Sustain effect for all Voices in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to
check whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to
play.
Sustain Length
The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard.
Press the appropriate button to make the “¿(÷)” indicator flash (Upper Keyboard: [B]
button; Lower Keyboard: [C] button; Pedal Keyboard: [D] button), then use the
DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
49
Rotary Speaker
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front
panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation).
Keep in mind that the Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning
on the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. To use the Rotary Speaker effect, follow the
steps below.
1
3
Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker for one of the Voice sections, you can
select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition display, Page
4. See page 45 for details.
Voice Controls and Effects
Select “Rotary Speaker” here
EFFECT¿ROTARY SP.¨1›
TYPE¿01:XG ROTARY SP
2
Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button to call up the Rotary Speaker display.
The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections.
<ROTARY SPEAKER>
SPEED¿4.88 MODE÷SLOW
1
1
2
Speed
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
2
Mode
Determines the slow/stop mode when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off.
If Slow is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button
on the panel. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops
completely) when you turn off the button on the panel.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the
effect in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch.
50
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left
Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel but also by using
the Left Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned.
See “4 Rotary Speaker” on page 149 for details.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
3
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
51
3 Effect List
PRESET
Parameter
Range
Description
R DelayTime
0.1 – 743.0 msec
Echo: 0.1 – 371.5
msec
Determines the time that elapses
between the original sound and
the delayed repeat in the right
channel.
C DelayTime
0.1 – 743.0 msec
Determines the time that elapses
between the original sound and
the delayed repeat in the center
of the stereo image.
REVERB
L>R Delay
0.1 – 371.5 msec
Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound,
recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual
performance spaces and rooms.
Determines the time for the sound
to move from left to right (when
using Cross Delay).
R>L Delay
0.1 – 371.5 msec
Determines the time for the sound
to move from right to left (when
using Cross Delay).
DelayTime
16th – 8th.
When using Tempo Delay, this
sets the time between delayed
repeats to match the tempo of the
rhythm/song.
InputSelect
L, R, L/R
Determines the input
configuration.
FB Delay
0.1 – 743.0 msec
Determines the feedback time of
the delayed repeats. The larger
the value, the longer the time
between delayed repeats. (For
Delay LR, the left and right
channels can be set
independently.)
FB Level
-63 – +63
Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the sound.
When this is set to 0%, the
delayed repeat from the second
time will not sound.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
The effect type that best matches and is most suited
to the currently selected sound is automatically
selected.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
No.
Type
No.
Type
01
HALL 1
14
STAGE 2
02
HALL 2
15
PLATE 1
03
HALL 3
16
PLATE 2
04
HALL M
17
XG HALL 1
05
HALL L
18
XG HALL 2
06
ROOM 1
19
XG ROOM 1
07
ROOM 2
20
XG ROOM 2
08
ROOM 3
21
XG ROOM 3
09
ROOM 4
22
XG STAGE 1
10
ROOM S
23
XG STAGE 2
11
ROOM M
24
XG PLATE
12
ROOM L
25
GM PLATE
13
STAGE 1
Parameter
Range
Description
Time
0.3 – 30.0 s
Determines the decay time of the
reverb.
KARAOKE
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of the
original sound (dry) and the effect
sound (wet).
Produces a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke
sing-along applications.
No.
Type
DELAY
01
KARAOKE 1
Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or
echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic
repeats in the sound.
02
KARAOKE 2
03
KARAOKE 3
Parameter
No.
52
Type
01
DELAY LCR
02
XG DLY LCR
03
DELAY LR
04
ECHO
05
CROSS DELAY
06
TEMPO DELAY
Parameter
Range
Description
L DelayTime
0.1 – 743.0 msec
Echo: 0.1 – 371.5
msec
Determines the time that elapses
between the original sound and
the delayed repeat in the left
channel.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Range
Description
DelayTime
0.1 – 400 msec
Determines the time that elapses
between the original sound and
the delayed repeat.
FB Level
-63 – +63
Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the sound.
When this is set to 0%, the
delayed repeat from the second
time will not sound.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of the
original sound and effect sound.
Parameter
Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound
were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer,
“fatter” and more animated.
No.
Type
No.
CHORUS 1
10
GM CHORUS 4
02
CHORUS 2
11
FB CHORUS
03
XG CHORUS 1
12
CELESTE 1
04
XG CHORUS 2
13
CELESTE 2
05
XG CHORUS 3
14
CELESTE 3
06
XG CHORUS 4
15
CELESTE 4
07
GM CHORUS 1
16
SYMPHONIC
08
GM CHORUS 2
17
XG SYMPHONIC
09
GM CHORUS 3
Value
Description
Determines the frequency of
oscillation, or the speed of the
wavering effect.
LFO Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of
oscillation, or the amount of the
wavering effect.
FB Level
-63 – +63
Determines the amount of output
sound (with the flanging effect)
that is returned to the input. The
larger the value, the more
complex and pronounced the
flanging effect becomes.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the original sound
and the effect sound.
Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre
changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep
effect.
0.00 – 39.7 Hz
Determines the frequency of
oscillation, or the speed of the
wavering effect.
LFO Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of
oscillation, or the amount of the
wavering effect.
01
PHASER
02
EP PHASER 1
Determines the balance of the
original sound and the effect
sound.
03
EP PHASER 2
04
EP PHASER 3
Input Mode
D63>W – D<W63
Mono/Stereo
No.
Type
18
ENS DETUNE
Parameter
Value
Determines the input
configuration.
Description
Detune
-50 – +50 cent
Determines the amount of
detuning (or pitch shifting) is
applied to the delayed repeats.
L DelayTime
0.0 – 50.0 msec
Determines the time that elapses
between the original sound and
the delayed repeat in the left
channel.
R DelayTime
0.0 – 50.0 msec
Determines the time that elapses
between the original sound and
the delayed repeat in the right
channel.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of the
original sound and the effect
sound.
FLANGER
This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect,
similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant
sound.
No.
Type
Type
Parameter
Value
Description
LFO Freq.
0.00 – 39.7 Hz
Determines the frequency of
oscillation, or the speed of the
wavering effect.
L/R Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of
oscillation, or the amount of the
wavering effect.
Phase Shift
0 – 127
Determines the phase
relationship between the
processed signal and the
original. This changes the sound
characteristics of the Phaser
effect.
FB Level
-63 – +63
Determines the amount of output
sound (with the phasing effect)
that is returned to the input. The
larger the value, the more
complex and pronounced the
phasing effect becomes.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of the
original sound and the effect
sound.
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
This periodically changes the volume and has the
effect of moving the sound image both front and
back, and left and right.
No.
No.
3
PHASER
LFO Freq.
Dry/Wet
Description
0.00 – 39.7 Hz
Type
01
Parameter
Value
LFO Freq.
Voice Controls and Effects
CHORUS
Type
01
TREMOLO 1
01
FLANGER 1
02
TREMOLO 2
02
FLANGER 2
03
XG TREMOLO
03
XG FLANGER 1
04
EP TREMOLO
04
XG FLANGER 2
05
GT TREMOLO 1
05
XG FLANGER 3
06
GT TREMOLO 2
06
GM FLANGER
07
ORGAN TREM.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
53
Parameter
Range
Description
LFO Freq.
0.00 – 39.7 Hz
Determines the tremolo speed.
AM Depth
0 – 127
Determines the amount of volume
change.
PM Depth
0 – 127
Determines the amount of pitch
change in the sound.
Input Mode
Mono/Stereo
Determines the input
configuration.
LFO Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of the
Tremolo effect.
L/R Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of panning
between the left and right
channels.
F/R Depth
0 – 127
Front/rear. Determines the depth
of the front and rear panning
effect. This controls both level
and pitch at the same time.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
No.
Type
08
AUTO PAN
09
XG AT PAN
10
EP AUTO PAN
Parameter
Parameter
Value
Determines the frequency of the
Auto Pan effect, or how fast the
sound shifts between the left and
right channels.
L/R Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of the left/
right panning effect.
F/R Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of the front/
rear panning effect. This controls
both level and pitch at the same
time.
Pan
L<->R
L->R
L<-R
Lturn
Rturn
L/R
Determines the Auto Pan type.
(“L<->R” is a sine wave and “L/R”
is a sawtooth wave.)
This effect adds distortion to the sound.
No.
Type
01
DIST HARD
02
DIST SOFT
03
OVERDRIVE
04
XG DIST
05
XG AMP SIM
This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ
sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of
a rotating speaker horn.
02
ROTARY SP 1
03
ROTARY SP 2
04
ROTARY SP 3
05
ROTARY SP 4
54
Value
Description
EQ LowFreq.
32 – 2.0k Hz
Determines the central frequency
of the low frequency range that is
boosted or cut.
EQ Low Gain
-12 – +12 dB
Determines the amount over
which the low frequency range is
boosted or cut.
EQ Hi.Freq.
500 – 16k Hz
Determines the central frequency
of the high frequency range that
is boosted or cut.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Description
0 – 127
Determines the amount or degree
of distortion in the sound.
Amp. Type
Off
Stack
Combo
Tube
Determines the type of amplifier
that is simulated.
LPF Cutoff
1.0 – 18k Hz
Thru
Determines the cutoff frequency
of the low pass filter. Frequencies
above this value are cut or filtered
out.
OutputLevel
0 – 127
Determines the level or volume of
the processed sound.
EQ Low Gain
-12 – +12 dB
Determines the amount of EQ
boost or cut in the low frequency
range.
EQ Mid.Gain
-12 – +12 dB
Determines the amount of EQ
boost or cut in the mid frequency
range.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of the
original sound and the effect
sound.
This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to
change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wahwah” sound.
No.
Type
XG ROTARY SP
Value
Drive
WAH
ROTARY SPEAKER
01
Description
Determines the amount over
which the high frequency range is
boosted or cut.
DISTORTION
Description
0.00 – 39.7 Hz
Parameter
-12 – +12 dB
Parameter
LFO Freq.
No.
Value
EQ Hi.Gain
Type
01
AUTO WAH
02
XG AUTO WAH
03
TOUCH WAH 1
04
TOUCH WAH 2
05
CLAVI TC WAH
06
EP TOUCH WAH
Parameter
Value
Description
LFO Freq.
0.00 – 39.7 Hz
Determines the speed of the Wah
effect.
LFO Depth
0 – 127
Determines the depth of the Wah
effect.
Cutoff
0 – 127
Determines the central frequency
that the wah filter acts upon.
Resonance
1.0 – 12.0
Determines the frequency
bandwidth (around the central
frequency set in Cutoff above)
that the wah filter affects.
Value
Description
Parameter
Value
Description
0 – 127
Determines the degree to which
the wah filter is affected by your
playing touch.
EQ LowFreq.
50 – 2.0k Hz
ST 2Band EQ:
32 – 2.0k Hz
Determines the central frequency
of the low frequency range that is
to be boosted or cut.
Dry/Wet
D63>W – D<W63
Determines the balance of the
original sound and the effect
sound.
EQ Low Gain
-12 – +12 dB
Determines the amount over
which the low frequency range is
boosted or cut.
EQ Mid.Freq
100 – 16k Hz
Determines the central frequency
of the middle frequency range
that is to be boosted or cut.
EQ Mid.Gain
-12 – +12 dB
Determines the amount over
which the middle frequency
range is boosted or cut.
EQ M Width
0.1 – 12.0
Determines the bandwidth or the
range of frequencies around the
specific middle frequency that is
to be boosted or cut. Lower
values let you narrow in on a
specific frequency, while higher
values select a broader range of
frequencies to be affected.
DYNAMIC
This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the
overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain
control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and
thus give more “punch” to the sound.
No.
Type
01
COMPRESSOR
02
NOISE GATE
Parameter
Value
Description
Attack
1 – 40 msec
Determines how soon the
compression effect is applied,
once the compressor has been
triggered (as a result of Threshold
below.
Release
10 – 680 msec
Determines how soon the
compressor returns to its normal
gain, once the trigger signal
drops below the Threshold point.
Threshold
Compressor:
-48 – -6 dB
Noise Gate:
-72 – -30 dB
Determines the level of the input
signal required to trigger the
compressor. Signals at a level
below the Threshold pass
through unaffected; signals at
and above the Threshold are
compressed.
Ratio
1.0 – 20.0
OutputLevel
0 – 127
Determines the amount of
compression of the sound (for
signals passing the Threshold).
This is expressed as a ratio—the
change in output signal relative to
the change in input. The range
here is 1/1 (no change in output
signal, hence no compression) to
20/1. Higher ratios result in
greater compression.
Determines the overall output of
the compressed signal. Use this
to bring up the overall level after
you’ve reduced the dynamic
range with compression.
EQ/ENHANCER
EQ Hi.Freq
500 Hz – 16k Hz
Determines the central frequency
of the high frequency range that
is to be boosted or cut.
EQ Hi.Gain
-12 – +12 dB
Determines how much increase/
decrease the wave frequency
point of EQ high frequency.
3
Voice Controls and Effects
Parameter
Sensitivity
ENHANCER
This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in
the high frequency sound range overtone—not
merely making the sound brighter, but giving it more
clarity and presence.
No.
Type
06
HM ENHANCER
07
XG HM ENHNCE
Parameter
Value
Description
HPF Cutoff
500 Hz – 16k Hz
Determines the cutoff frequency
of the low pass filter. Frequencies
above this value are cut or filtered
out.
Drive
0 – 127
Determines the amount or depth
of the Enhancer effect.
Mix Level
0 – 127
Determines how much of the
processed enhanced sound is
mixed together with the original
sound.
THRU
Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.
EQ
This processing tool lets you change the level for
specific frequency ranges in the sound, and affects the
overall sound quality.
No.
No.
01
Type
Thru
Type
01
ST 2BAND EQ
02
ST 3BAND EQ
03
XG 3BAND EQ
04
EQ DISCO
05
EQ TEL
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
55
4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This Electone features 133 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion
sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing
appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected
rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to
directly play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons
A total of 133 rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the
front panel.
To select and play a rhythm
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the
front panel.
For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display
(Rhythm Menu) will appear.
Rhythm Menu display
<DANCE>
¿01:Ibiza
The Rhythm Menu contains many Dance rhythms, and the currently selected
Dance rhythm is shown in the display.
56
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
2
Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display.
You can select the hidden dance rhythms in sequence (forward or reverse) by
using the DATA CONTROL dial.
<DANCE>
¿04:UK Pop
Here, we’ve selected “UK Pop.”
You can select the rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by pressing the [C] button
one or more times. Each press of the [C] button selects subsequent hidden rhythms.
When the final item is reached, pressing the [C] button “wraps around” to the first
item.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
3
4
Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm.
Reference Page
Operating the rhythm from
the panel (page 59)
To stop the rhythm, press this button again.
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing
the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm.
4
Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons.
The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to
a maximum of full volume.
Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the
Rhythm Condition display (page 62).
Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 68)
Reference Page
Changing the rhythm
volume/reverb (page 62)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
57
Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic
rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats
while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played
back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected
with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically
shifts to the Main section.
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
MAIN
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be
selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures
repeats indefinitely.
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating
rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit)
MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes
playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section.
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is
selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes
playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the rhythm
automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING
[1] – [3] buttons.
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
58
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Operating the rhythm from the panel
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the
buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic
interest and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the
button again.
4
SYNCHRO START
INTRO
NOTE
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you
press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the
[SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm.
When you start the rhythm
with [SYNCHRO START]
button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When
Memory is off, releasing
your fingers from Lower
keyboard stops the rhythm.
For details on Memory and
the A.B.C. function, see
page 71.
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before
starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press
the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first
measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time,
the display at right appears:
ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before
stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the
rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending
gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the
ending is playing.
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1]
button during playback of
the Main section will first call
up the Fill In pattern, then
the Ending 1 pattern.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
59
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/
FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section's lamp (above the button) lights.
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/
FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the
selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Reference Page
To select and play a rhythm
(page 56)
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto
Fill In function is set in the Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up the
Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm
button again.
<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄
VOL.¿12
REV.÷ 8
When Auto Fill is set to On (”) in the right side of the display, the Fill In pattern is
automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. Each press of the [B]
button toggles between On (”) and Off (’).
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]
button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks.
60
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Adjusting the tempo
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons.
3
TEMPO Indicator
1
1 TEMPO
2
buttons
For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo
and pressing the left button decreases it.
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously
to restore the tempo to the original setting.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
2 TEMPO
4
Display (BAR/BEAT Indicator)
TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per
minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/
BEAT indicator.
BAR/BEAT Indicator
Bar (measure) Beat
The number on the left in the BAR/BEAT indicator indicates the current bar or
measure and the one on the right indicates the current beat in the bar.
3
BAR/BEAT indicator
The beat indicator lamp above the TEMPO display also indicates the beats.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
61
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the
percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You can also
have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON.
To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same
rhythm button again.
4
[Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display
1
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄
VOL.¿12
REV.÷ 8
2
3
The buttons at the right and left side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial can
control the rhythm volume and reverb.
1
Auto Fill
When Auto Fill is set to On (”) in the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically
played whenever you switch the Main sections.
For details on how to set to On, see page 17.
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set in the display),
two adjacent Volume button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
2 Volume
Fine Adjustment of rhythm volume.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
3
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 48)
Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here
will have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
62
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or
2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that have
been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm Pattern
Program function (such as the ELS-01/01C/01X). For details on selecting original User
rhythms, see next page.
This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be
selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others
from the User buttons.
For example, to call up “Modern R&B,” select the R&B category.
Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
4
<USER>
¿01:User 1
2
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1
[FILE]⁄⁄
Select one of the pages with the Page buttons.
Currently selected Page
<R&B>
¿01:Motor City
fi
In this case, select Page 5 “R&B.”
3
Select the “Modern R&B” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL dial.
<R&B>
¿06:Modern R&B
fi
This step assigns “Modern R&B” to the User button [1]. You can call up the
“Modern R&B” the next time you press the [1] button.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
63
To call up a User rhythm
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming
functions, such as the ELS-01/01C/01X, can be selected and played from the User
buttons in the panel Rhythm section.
To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to
Electone in advance.
For details on loading back the Registration, see “Playing Back a Song” on page 132.
This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48.
4
1
Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
2
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 11 (User Page).
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
<USER>
¿01:User 1
3
Select the User rhythm number by turning the DATA CONTROL
dial.
<USER>
¿04:User 4
64
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
[FILE]⁄⁄
[FILE]⁄⁄
Selecting Rhythm from an External Media
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can load rhythms from a USB storage device, and select them as User Rhythms.
Style File Format files (extension: STY or ST2) can also be loaded.
1
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
2
Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 11 (User Page).
<USER>
¿01:User 1
4
[FILE]⁄⁄
Select the User number to which you want to load back the
pattern file.
<USER>
¿04:User 4
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
4
[FILE]⁄⁄
Press the [B] button corresponding to [FILE] in the display to
turn on the file loading function.
<USER>
¿04:User 4
[FILE]⁄⁄
<FILE SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
The File Select display appears.
⁄⁄
[Õ]
NOTE
File loading cannot be done
while the M.D.R. function is
used or sequence data is
playing back.
The rhythm stops
automatically if the File
Select display is called up
while the rhythm is being
played.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
65
6
Select the pattern file you want to load to the Electone.
File selection is done in the same way as song selection on page 111.
<FILE SELECT> [˜]⁄⁄
¿ 001:SoftRock [EXE]
7
NOTE
To play back the User
rhythm, first quit the File
Select display.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
66
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
8
Press the [D] button corresponding to the [EXE] in the display to
load the file back to the Electone.
This step assigns the pattern file to the User number selected in the step 4.
For details on playing back the User rhythm, see “To call up a
User rhythm” on page 64.
Rhythm List
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.
The letters A, B and D printed at the right side of each column in this list indicate the corresponding DATA
CONTROL button’s name. Pressing that button selects the corresponding rhythm.
08
Easy Ballad
DANCE
09
Guitar Ballad
01
Ibiza
10
Organ Ballad
02
Euro Trance
Frankly Soul
11
Chart Ballad
03
Techno Party
Jazz Funk
12
Analog Ballad
04
UK Pop
05
Detroit Pop
13
8Beat Modern
05
Swing House
6/8 Organ March
06
Modern R&B
14
Chillout
06
US Hip Hop
07
Broadway
07
New Gospel
15
Slow&Easy
07
Ground Beat
08
SF March
08
Gospel Shuffle
16
6/8 Slow Rock
08
Hip Hop Pop
09
Wild West
09
Gospel Sisters
ROCK
09
Club Latin
10
Baroque
10
6/8 Soul
01
Power Rock
10
Latin Disco
11
Metronome 2/4
11
Blues Shuffle
02
Southern Rock
11
Garage
03
60's Rock
12
6/8 Trance
04
Hard Rock
B
13
80's Dance
D
01
Marching Band 1
02
Marching Band 2
03
Marching Band 3
04
6/8 March
05
R&B
A
01
Motor City
02
Soul
03
04
6/8 Kids
06
B
D
A
B
D
B
D
A
A
WALTZ
LATIN
01
Gentle Waltz
01
Big Band Samba
02
Guitar Serenade
02
Light Samba
05
Rock Shuffle
14
Pop Beat
03
Snow Waltz
03
Bossa Nova
06
Tears Rock 1
15
Disco Philly
04
Classic Waltz
04
Pop Bossa
07
Tears Rock 2
16
70's Disco
05
Mariachi
05
Mambo 1
08
British Rock
17
Disco Chocolate
06
Musette
06
Mambo 2
09
New Country
07
Jazz Waltz 1
07
Montuno
10
Rock&Roll
08
Jazz Waltz 2
08
Calypso
11
Jive
09
Metronome 3/4
09
Cha Cha Cha
10
Big Band Cha Cha
11
Pop Cha Cha
A
B
D
SWING&JAZZ
01
Big Band 1
A
02
Big Band 2
12
Rumba
03
Big Band Bop
13
Beguine
04
Orch. Big Band
14
Tango 1
05
Orchestra Swing
15
Tango 2
06
Jungle Drum
07
Medium Jazz
01
Bolero
08
Afro Cuban
02
Flamenco
09
Five-Four
03
Pop Flamenco
10
Jazz Ballad
04
Pasodoble
11
Moonlight
05
Polka 1
Winter Song
06
Polka 2
13
Dixieland
07
Banda Polka
15
Dixieland Jazz
Charleston
08
D
POPS
09
10
Irish Dance
8Beat Light 2
12
Bluegrass
Folk Rock
13
Hoedown
04
Asian Pops
14
Hawaiian
05
Unplugged
15
Mexican Dance
06
Bubblegum Pop
BALLAD
07
Guitar Pop
08
British 16Beat
09
02
03
A
01
Power Ballad
02
Dramatic Ballad
Fusion Shuffle
03
Movie Ballad
10
Jazz Pop
04
Carpenters Pop
11
Pop Shuffle
05
Love Song
12
British Pop
06
16Beat Ballad 1
13
Metronome 4/4
07
16Beat Ballad 2
B
D
D
4
Certain rhythms that have been created for use with
slow, soft songs or for songs that do not use a bass part at
the beginning, may not have drum sections. To use these
rhythms, refer to the following information.
The following rhythms/sections do not contain a drum
part. To play back these rhythms/sections, make sure to
turn the accompaniment parts on.
A
Category
MARCH
B
WALTZ
WORLD MUSIC
Enka
Sheriff Reggae
8Beat Light 1
D
Tarantella
11
01
B
WORLD MUSIC
B
12
14
A
B
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
MARCH
BALLAD
D
A
Rhythm
Sections
6/8 Organ March
Main A, Main B
Baroque
All sections except Intro 1
Guitar Serenade
All sections except Intro 1
Banda Polka
Main A, Fill In A
Mexican Dance
Main A, Fill In A
Dramatic Ballad
Main A
Some sections of the following three rhythms do not
contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even though
the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass part will not
sound.
• WALTZ: Guitar Serenade
• WORLD MUSIC: Pop Flamenco
• ROCK: New Country
• Metronome 2/4
• Metronome 3/4
• Metronome 4/4
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
67
3 Accompaniment
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental
embellishments when rhythms are used. This control is selected from Page 3 and Page 4
of the Rhythm Condition display.
1
Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the
panel again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄
VOL.¿12
REV.÷ 8
2
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3 or Page 4.
<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄
VOL.¿12
REV.÷ 8
[Page 3] Rhythm Condition Display
”MAIN DR.
’CHORD1
”ADD DR.‹
’CHORD2
Accompaniment
[Page 4] Rhythm Condition Display
’PAD
’PHRASE1
›
’PHRASE2
Accompaniment
Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually confirm the On/Off
status for all parts in Page 3 and Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. These
parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are
Accompaniment parts.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,
and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding
button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.
68
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
3
Turn the desired parts on.
Successive presses of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired
accompaniment parts alternates between On and Off.
[Page 3] Rhythm Condition Display
”MAIN DR.
’CHORD1
1
”ADD DR.‹
’CHORD2
2
[Page 4] Rhythm Condition Display
3
4
›
”PHRASE2
4
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
’PAD
’PHRASE1
1
Chord 1
2 Chord 2
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
To set the On/Off status for Chord 1, use the [C] button in Page 3 of the
Rhythm Condition display; for Chord 2, use the [D] button.
3
Pad
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as
strings and organ.
To set the On/Off status for Pad, use the [A] button in Page 4 of the Rhythm
Condition display.
4
Phrase 1
5 Phrase 2
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song,
such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
To set the On/Off status for Phrase 1, use the [C] button in Page 4 of the
Rhythm Condition display; for Phrase 2, use the [D] button.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending
on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do
not sound.
Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has
additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
69
4
Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the
Lower Keyboard.
To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment:
Make settings in Page 2 of the Rhythm Condition display.
4
Reference Page
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm Condition display
(page 62)
1
2
Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm
button on the panel again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.
<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄
VOL.¿12
REV.÷ 8
[Page 2] Rhythm Condition Display
<ACCOMPANIMENT>
¤
VOL.¿16
REV.÷ 8
1
2
Determine the reverb and volume settings.
1
Volume
Determines the accompaniment volume.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
2
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 48)
Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb
Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have
no effect.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
70
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
4
Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass
Chord (A.B.C.)
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the
Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely
new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your
disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment
patterns. You can select the desired mode in Page 1 of the A.B.C. display.
To set the A.B.C. function:
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
4
The A.B.C. display appears.
[Page 1] A.B.C. Display
<ABC>
¿OFF
’L.MEMORY⁄
’P.MEMORY
1 OFF
2 SINGLE
3 FINGERED
4 CUSTOM
Select the desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.
A.B.C. Mode
You can select modes in sequence: Off → Single Finger → Fingered Chord → Custom
A.B.C. by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA
CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order.
When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/
Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard
stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on page 73.
1
Off
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
71
NOTE
When the A.B.C. function
mode is set to Single or
Fingered Chord, the bass
part will not sound even if
you play the pedals of the
Pedalboard.
2
Single
You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at
most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the
fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord
produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.
Key of C
C
Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s
name).
Cm
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.
C7
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.
4
Cm7
Minor 7th chords:
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white
key to the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
3
Fingered Chord
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords
played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in
the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you
play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on
the basis of the previously played chord.
Key of C
NOTE
When playing certain
chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6,
and m6), make sure that the
lowest not you play is the
root of the chord.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
Cmaj7
Cm maj7
Caug
Cdim
Cdim7
Csus4
C7sus4
Cm7-5
C6
Cm6
Cadd9
Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
4
Custom A.B.C.
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode.
It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by
playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.
72
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Memory
The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that
makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more fluid. It is available
separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on,
start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C. mode.
With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you release your
fingers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply play it and
release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord and bass
note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note briefly, release it, and take your
time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep the
accompaniment going.
When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the
rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower keyboard
and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note.
4
1
’L.MEMORY⁄
’P.MEMORY
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
<ABC>
¿OFF
2
1
Lower Memory
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment
keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while
the rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between On and Off.
2
Pedal Memory
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep
playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm
plays.
Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between On and Off.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass
accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release
your fingers from the Lower keyboard.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
73
5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the
melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords
you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you use
Automatic Accompaniment.
To set the M.O.C. function:
1
4
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C. display appears.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
2
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.
<ABC>
¿OFF
’L.MEMORY⁄
’P.MEMORY
[Page 2] M.O.C. Display
<MOC>
MODE¿OFF
¤
M.O.C. display appears.
3
Turn the M.O.C. on.
Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between On and Off.
<MOC>
MODE¿ON
¤
On:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.
Off:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s
volume is set to the appropriate value.
Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice.
74
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Sequence
Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting
together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created
on other Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as
ELS-01).
Although the ELB-01 does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function,
you can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers 1 – 4 in the display
for future recall, using the steps below.
When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next
Registration data, these data also can be loaded and played on the ELB-01.
While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be
loaded.
2
Press the [MDR] button and select the desired song you want
to load back to Electone.
This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the
registration data in the song.
ÃUSB 01
¿ 001:SONG 1
3
4
Insert the media that contains the desired rhythm sequence
data into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1
Reference Pages
Songs (page 116)
Selecting a Song
(page 111)
[˜] ⁄
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the MDR section to load
back the desired registration.
Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers 1—4.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
75
4
NOTE
5
Sequence numbers 1 – 4
can be turned on at the
same time.
4
Press the [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button to call up the Rhythm
Sequence display.
Select the sequence by pressing the [A] – [D] buttons
corresponding to the desired sequence number in the display
to be played back.
Successive pressing of the [A] – [D] buttons alternates between On and Off.
Use the [A] button for Sequence 1, [B] for Sequence 2, [C] for Sequence 3
and [D] for Sequence 4.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
”SEQ.1
’SEQ.3
6
76
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
”SEQ.2
’SEQ.4
Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back
the rhythm sequence.
Only those sequences set to On can be played. Two or more rhythm
sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. After playing
back, the solid square indication turns to a hollow square in the display.
6 Keyboard Percussion
The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion
sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two
different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset
drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User
Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you
wish.
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Reference Page
4
On/Off status of Voices
(page 28)
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to
play Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and
press the [2] button for the Pedalboard.
[Page 1] Keyboard Percussion Display
<KBP1>
¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1
NOTE
⁄
Two Keyboard Percussion
sets, [1] and [2], can be
played at the same time by
setting both buttons to on.
Select the desired percussion kit.
You can select a kit from a total of 15 different kits.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the kit.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
77
3
Select the desired percussion kit.
You can select a kit from a total of 15 different kits.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the kit.
<KBP1>
¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder
4
⁄
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard
Percussion List” on page 80.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Reference Page
On/Off status of Voices
(page 28)
Reference Pages
Using the Preset Keyboard
Percussion (page 77)
Recalling the User
Keyboard Percussion
(page 92)
You can make settings in Page 2 of the Keyboard Percussion display.
1
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
2
Press the Keyboard Percussion button.
<KBP1>
¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2 of the Keyboard
Percussion display.
<KBP1>
VOL.¿16
78
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
⁄
¤
REV.÷ 8
[Page 2] Keyboard Percussion Display
<KBP1>
VOL.¿16
1
¤
REV.÷ 8
2
You can adjust the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb in the display.
1 Volume
Determine the Keyboard Percussion volume.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to select the kit.
4
2
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Range: 0 – 24
Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here
will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to select the kit.
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 48)
Range: 0 – 24
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
79
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments.
Wonderland Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
Preset 1 (UK)
Laser Beam
BD Heavy
Horse
Laser Shot
SD BrRoll
Bass Drum
Water Phone
SD Heavy
Footsteps
Bubble
SD BrShot 1
Snare
Puddle
SD Reverb 1
Snare Roll
Thunder
SD Light
Footsteps
Shower
Tom 3
Synth Tom 3
Lion
Beach
SD Rim 1
Concert BD
Footsteps
Stream
Tom 2
Synth Tom 2
Oxen
Footsteps
HH Close
BD Heavy
Footsteps
Door Squeak
Tom 1
Synth Tom 1
B1
Door Slam
Door Slam
HH Open
BD Light
C2
Big Clock
Bass Drum
Bass Drum
Ride Cym 1
SD Heavy
–
Footsteps
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa
Synth Tom 3
SD BrRoll
–
Starship
Tom 2
Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
SD Heavy
–
Footsteps
Tom 1
Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
SD BrShot 1
–
E2
Train
Snare
Snare
Orch Cym
SD Reverb 1
–
F2
Car Crash
Snare Roll
Snare Roll
SD Light
–
Footsteps
HH Closed
HH Closed
Tom 3
–
Puddle
Cymbal
Cymbal
SD Rim 1
–
HH Open
HH Open
Tom 2
–
Tambourine
Tambourine
HH Close
–
FingerSnaps
FingerSnaps
Tom 1
–
B2
Castanet
Castanet
HH Open
–
C3
Triangle M
Triangle M
Ride Cym 1
–
Woodblock L
Woodblock L
Orch SD
–
Triangle O
Triangle O
Crash Cym 1
–
Woodblock H
Woodblock H
SD Roll
–
E3
Handclap
Handclap
Orch Cym
–
F3
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
OrchCymRoll
–
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Triangle M
–
Alarm Bell
Alarm Bell
Tambourine
–
Train
Train
Triangle O
–
Horn 1
Horn 1
Castanet
–
Horn 2
Horn 2
Cowbell 1
–
B3
Siren
Siren
Timbale 1 L
–
C4
Car Engine
Car Engine
Timbale 1 H
–
Car Crash
Car Crash
WoodBlock L
–
Helicopter
Helicopter
Conga L
–
Starship
Starship
WoodBlock H
–
E4
Sheep
Sheep
Conga H
–
F4
Goat
Goat
Bongo L
–
Oxen
Oxen
Agogo L
–
Whinny
Whinny
Bongo H
–
Horse
Horse
Agogo H
–
Lion
Lion
Cuica L
–
Dog
Dog
Hand Claps
–
B4
Cat
Cat
Cuica H
–
C5
Rooster
Rooster
Shaker
–
C1
D1
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
F2
G2
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
C5
Synth Tom 1
Claves
Owl
–
Insects
–
Frog
–
E5
Tweet 1
–
F5
Tweet 2
–
CuckooClock
–
Big Clock
–
Bell
–
Telephone
–
Camera
–
B5
Gnaw
–
C6
Applause
–
D5
D5
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.
80
Preset 1 (UK)
Thunder
C1
4
EL Drum Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
C1
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick
C1
Standard Kit 2
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick Short
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Side Stick
Surdo Mute
SideStick L
Surdo Mute
Snare
Surdo Open
Snare Short
Surdo Open
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Snare Tight
Whip Slap
SnareTightH
Whip Slap
Floor Tom L
Scratch H
Floor Tom L
Scratch H
HH Closed
Scratch L
HH Closed
Scratch L
Floor Tom H
Finger Snap
Floor Tom H
Finger Snap
HH Pedal
Click Noise
HH Pedal
Click Noise
Low Tom
Metro.Click
Low Tom
Metro.Click
HH Open
Metro.Bell
HH Open
Metro.Bell
B1
Mid Tom L
Seq Click L
Mid Tom L
Seq Click L
C2
Mid Tom H
Seq Click H
–
Mid Tom H
Seq Click H
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
High Tom
Brush Swirl
–
High Tom
Brush Swirl
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Splash Cym
Snare Soft
–
Splash Cym
SnareSoft 2
–
Sticks
–
Sticks
–
Kick Soft
–
Kick Soft
–
OpenRimShot
–
OpRimShot H
–
B2
Kick Tight
–
Kick Tight
C3
Kick
Bongo H
Kick Short
Bongo H
Side Stick
Bongo L
SideStick L
Bongo L
Snare
CongaH Mute
Snare Short
CongaH Mute
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
E3
Snare Tight
Conga L
SnareTightH
Conga L
F3
Floor Tom L
Timbale H
Floor Tom L
Timbale H
HH Closed
Timbale L
HH Closed
Timbale L
Floor Tom H
Agogo H
Floor Tom H
Agogo H
HH Pedal
Agogo L
HH Pedal
Agogo L
Low Tom
Cabasa
Low Tom
Cabasa
HH Open
Maracas
HH Open
Maracas
B3
Mid Tom L
SambaWhis.H
Mid Tom L
SambaWhis.H
C4
Mid Tom H
SambaWhis.L
Mid Tom H
SambaWhis.L
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
High Tom
Guiro Long
High Tom
Guiro Long
Ride Cym 1
Claves
Ride Cym 1
Claves
E4
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
F4
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Cowbell
Triangle M
Cowbell
Triangle M
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Vibraslap
Shaker
Vibraslap
Shaker
Ride Cym 2
JingleBells
Ride Cym 2
D1
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
E2
F2
F2
G2
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
B4
C5
–
C5
Bell Tree
–
JingleBells
–
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
–
C6
–
–
D5
D5
E5
F5
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Standard Kit 1
Preset 2 (PK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
81
Hit Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
C1
C1
KickTight H
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Surdo Mute
Side Stick
Surdo Mute
SnareAmbien
Surdo Open
SnareSnappy
Surdo Open
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Hand Clap
Hi Q
SnareTight2
Whip Slap
SnrTightSnp
Whip Slap
HybridTom 1
Scratch H
Tom Room 1
Scratch H
HH Closed 2
Scratch L
HH Closed
Scratch L
HybridTom 2
Finger Snap
Tom Room 2
Finger Snap
HH Pedal 2
Click Noise
HH Pedal
Click Noise
HybridTom 3
Metro.Click
Tom Room 3
Metro.Click
HH Open 2
Metro.Bell
HH Open
Metro.Bell
B1
HybridTom 4
Seq Click L
Tom Room 4
Seq Click L
C2
HybridTom 5
Seq Click H
–
Tom Room 5
Seq Click H
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
HybridTom 6
Brush Swirl
–
Tom Room 6
Brush Swirl
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
E2
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
F2
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
TambourineL
Castanet
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Splash Cym
Snr Electro
–
Splash Cym
Snare Soft
–
Sticks
–
Sticks
–
KickTight L
–
Kick Soft
–
Snare Pitch
–
OpenRimShot
–
B2
Kick Wet
–
Kick Tight
C3
KickTight H
Bongo H
Kick
Bongo H
StickAmbien
Bongo L
Side Stick
Bongo L
SnareAmbien
CongaH Mute
SnareSnappy
CongaH Mute
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
E3
SnareTight2
Conga L
SnrTightSnp
Conga L
F3
HybridTom 1
Timbale H
Tom Room 1
Timbale H
HH Closed 2
Timbale L
HH Closed
Timbale L
HybridTom 2
Agogo H
Tom Room 2
Agogo H
HH Pedal 2
Agogo L
HH Pedal
Agogo L
HybridTom 3
Cabasa
Tom Room 3
Cabasa
HH Open 2
Maracas
HH Open
Maracas
B3
HybridTom 4
SambaWhis.H
Tom Room 4
SambaWhis.H
C4
HybridTom 5
SambaWhis.L
Tom Room 5
SambaWhis.L
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
HybridTom 6
Guiro Long
Tom Room 6
Guiro Long
Ride Cym 1
Claves
Ride Cym 1
Claves
E4
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
F4
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
TambourineL
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Cowbell
Triangle M
Cowbell
Triangle M
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Vibraslap
Shaker
Vibraslap
Shaker
Ride Cym 2
JingleBells
Ride Cym 2
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
F2
G2
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
B4
C5
C5
–
Bell Tree
–
–
JingleBells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
E5
–
–
F5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
–
C6
–
–
D5
D5
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
82
Room Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
StickAmbien
D1
4
Preset 1 (LK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Rock Kit
C1
C1
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick Gate
Electro Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
KickGateHvy
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Side Stick
Surdo Mute
Side Stick
Surdo Mute
Snare Rock
Surdo Open
SnareNoisy2
Surdo Open
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Hand Clap
Hi Q
SnRockTight
Whip Slap
SnareNoisy3
Whip Slap
Tom Rock 1
Scratch H
TomElectro1
Scratch H
HH Closed
Scratch L
HH Closed
Scratch L
Tom Rock 2
Finger Snap
TomElectro2
Finger Snap
HH Pedal
Click Noise
HH Pedal
Click Noise
Tom Rock 3
Metro.Click
TomElectro3
Metro.Click
HH Open
Metro.Bell
HH Open
Metro.Bell
B1
Tom Rock 4
Seq Click L
TomElectro4
Seq Click L
C2
Tom Rock 5
Seq Click H
–
TomElectro5
Seq Click H
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
Tom Rock 6
Brush Swirl
–
TomElectro6
Brush Swirl
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
E2
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
Chinese Cym
Reverse Cym
–
F2
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
–
Splash Cym
Snare Noisy
–
Splash Cym
SnrSnapElec
–
Sticks
–
Sticks
–
Kick Soft
–
Kick 3
–
OpenRimShot
–
OpenRimShot
–
B2
Kick 2
–
Kick Gate
C3
Kick Gate
Bongo H
KickGateHvy
Bongo H
Side Stick
Bongo L
Side Stick
Bongo L
Snare Rock
CongaH Mute
SnareNoisy2
CongaH Mute
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
E3
SnRockTight
Conga L
SnareNoisy3
Conga L
F3
Tom Rock 1
Timbale H
TomElectro1
Timbale H
HH Closed
Timbale L
HH Closed
Timbale L
Tom Rock 2
Agogo H
TomElectro2
Agogo H
HH Pedal
Agogo L
HH Pedal
Agogo L
Tom Rock 3
Cabasa
TomElectro3
Cabasa
HH Open
Maracas
HH Open
Maracas
B3
Tom Rock 4
SambaWhis.H
TomElectro4
SambaWhis.H
C4
Tom Rock 5
SambaWhis.L
TomElectro5
SambaWhis.L
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
Tom Rock 6
Guiro Long
TomElectro6
Guiro Long
Ride Cym 1
Claves
Ride Cym 1
Claves
E4
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
F4
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Scratch H 2
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Splash Cym
Scratch L 2
Cowbell
Triangle M
Cowbell
Triangle M
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Vibraslap
Shaker
Vibraslap
Shaker
Ride Cym 2
JingleBells
Ride Cym 2
D1
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
F2
G2
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
B4
C5
C5
–
Bell Tree
–
JingleBells
–
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
E5
–
–
F5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
–
C6
–
–
D5
D5
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Preset 2 (PK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
83
Analog Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
C1
C1
Kick Analog
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick Jazz
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Surdo Mute
SideStick L
Surdo Mute
SnareAnalog
Surdo Open
SnareJazz L
Surdo Open
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Hand Clap
Hi Q
SnareAnlg 2
Whip Slap
SnareJazz M
Whip Slap
TomAnalog 1
Scratch H
Floor Tom L
Scratch H
Hat CloseAn
Scratch L
HH Closed
Scratch L
TomAnalog 2
Finger Snap
Floor Tom H
Finger Snap
HatCloseAn2
Click Noise
HH Pedal
Click Noise
TomAnalog 3
Metro.Click
Low Tom
Metro.Click
Hat Open An
Metro.Bell
HH Open
Metro.Bell
B1
TomAnalog 4
Seq Click L
Mid Tom L
Seq Click L
C2
TomAnalog 5
Seq Click H
–
Mid Tom H
Seq Click H
–
CrashAnalog
Brush Tap
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
TomAnalog 6
Brush Swirl
–
High Tom
Brush Swirl
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
E2
Chinese Cym
Reverse Cym
–
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
F2
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Splash Cym
SnareNoisy4
–
Splash Cym
SnareJazz H
–
Sticks
–
Sticks
–
Kick 3
–
Kick Soft
–
OpenRimShot
–
OpenRimShot
–
B2
KickAnlgSht
–
Kick Tight
C3
Kick Analog
Bongo H
Kick Jazz
Bongo H
SideStickAn
Bongo L
SideStick L
Bongo L
SnareAnalog
CongaAnlg H
SnareJazz L
CongaH Mute
Hand Clap
CongaAnlg M
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
E3
SnareAnlg 2
CongaAnlg L
SnareJazz M
Conga L
F3
TomAnalog 1
Timbale H
Floor Tom L
Timbale H
Hat CloseAn
Timbale L
HH Closed
Timbale L
TomAnalog 2
Agogo H
Floor Tom H
Agogo H
HatCloseAn2
Agogo L
HH Pedal
Agogo L
TomAnalog 3
Cabasa
Low Tom
Cabasa
Hat Open An
Maracas 2
HH Open
Maracas
B3
TomAnalog 4
SambaWhis.H
Mid Tom L
SambaWhis.H
C4
TomAnalog 5
SambaWhis.L
Mid Tom H
SambaWhis.L
CrashAnalog
Guiro Short
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
TomAnalog 6
Guiro Long
High Tom
Guiro Long
Ride Cym 1
Claves 2
Ride Cym 1
Claves
E4
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
F4
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
Tambourine
Scratch H 2
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Splash Cym
Scratch L 2
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
CowbellAnlg
Triangle M
Cowbell
Triangle M
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Vibraslap
Shaker
Vibraslap
Shaker
Ride Cym 2
JingleBells
Ride Cym 2
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
F2
G2
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
B4
C5
C5
–
Bell Tree
–
–
JingleBells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
E5
–
–
F5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
–
C6
–
–
D5
D5
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
84
Jazz Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
SideStickAn
D1
4
Preset 1 (LK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
C1
C1
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick Jazz
Symphony Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
GranCassa M
Preset 1 (UK)
–
SideStick L
Surdo Mute
Side Stick
Surdo Mute
BrushSlap 3
Surdo Open
Band Snare
Surdo Open
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Brush Tap 2
Whip Slap
BandSnare 2
Whip Slap
Tom Brush 1
Scratch H
Floor Tom L
Scratch H
HH Closed
Scratch L
HH Closed
Scratch L
Tom Brush 2
Finger Snap
Floor Tom H
Finger Snap
HH Pedal
Click Noise
HH Pedal
Click Noise
Tom Brush 3
Metro.Click
Low Tom
Metro.Click
HH Open
Metro.Bell
HH Open
Metro.Bell
B1
Tom Brush 4
Seq Click L
Mid Tom L
Seq Click L
C2
Tom Brush 5
Seq Click H
–
Mid Tom H
Seq Click H
–
Crash Cym 1
Brush Tap
–
Hand Cymbal
Brush Tap
–
Tom Brush 6
Brush Swirl
–
High Tom
Brush Swirl
–
Ride Cym 1
Brush Slap
–
Hand Cym S
Brush Slap
–
E2
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
Chinese Cym
Br TapSwirl
–
F2
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
RideCym Cup
Snare Roll
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Tambourine
Castanet
–
Splash Cym
BrushSlap 2
–
Splash Cym
Snare Soft
–
Sticks
–
Sticks
–
Kick Soft
–
Kick Soft 2
–
OpenRimShot
–
OpenRimShot
–
B2
Kick Tight
–
Gran Cassa
C3
Kick Jazz
Bongo H
GranCassa M
Bongo H
SideStick L
Bongo L
Side Stick
Bongo L
BrushSlap 3
CongaH Mute
Band Snare
CongaH Mute
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
Hand Clap
CongaH Open
E3
Brush Tap 2
Conga L
BandSnare 2
Conga L
F3
Tom Brush 1
Timbale H
Floor Tom L
Timbale H
HH Closed
Timbale L
HH Closed
Timbale L
Tom Brush 2
Agogo H
Floor Tom H
Agogo H
HH Pedal
Agogo L
HH Pedal
Agogo L
Tom Brush 3
Cabasa
Low Tom
Cabasa
HH Open
Maracas
HH Open
Maracas
B3
Tom Brush 4
SambaWhis.H
Mid Tom L
SambaWhis.H
C4
Tom Brush 5
SambaWhis.L
Mid Tom H
SambaWhis.L
Crash Cym 1
Guiro Short
Hand Cymbal
Guiro Short
Tom Brush 6
Guiro Long
High Tom
Guiro Long
Ride Cym 1
Claves
Hand Cym S
Claves
E4
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
Chinese Cym
WoodBlock H
F4
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
RideCym Cup
WoodBlock L
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Splash Cym
Cuica Open
Cowbell
Triangle M
Cowbell
Triangle M
Crash Cym 2
Triangle O
Hand Cym 2
Triangle O
Vibraslap
Shaker
Vibraslap
Shaker
Ride Cym 2
JingleBells
HandCym 2 S
D1
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
F2
G2
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
B4
C5
C5
–
Bell Tree
–
–
JingleBells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
E5
–
–
F5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
–
C6
–
–
D5
D5
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Brush Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
85
SFX1
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 2 (PK)
Preset 1 (LK)
Preset 1 (UK)
–
Phone Call
–
CutingNoiz2
–
Door Squeak
–
–
–
Door Slam
–
–
Scratch Cut
–
–
–
Scratch H 3
–
–
–
Wind Chime
–
–
–
Phone Ring
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B1
–
–
–
–
C2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CarEngnIgni
–
–
–
–
–
CarTiresSql
–
–
–
–
–
Car Passing
–
–
–
–
–
Car Crash
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B2
–
–
–
C3
CutingNoiz1
–
Phone Call
Burst
CutingNoiz2
–
Door Squeak
Coaster
–
–
Door Slam
Submarine
–
Scratch Cut
–
C1
D1
D1
String Slap
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
C2
D2
D2
E2
F2
Fl.KeyClick
F2
G2
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
G2
A2
A2
C3
D3
D3
String Slap
–
E3
–
–
Scratch H 3
–
F3
–
–
Wind Chime
–
–
–
Phone Ring
–
–
–
F3
G3
G3
–
–
–
Shower
–
Laugh
–
Thunder
–
Scream
–
Wind
–
Punch
B3
–
Stream
–
Heart Beat
C4
–
Bubble
–
Foot Steps
–
Feed
–
–
A3
A3
C4
D4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CarEngnIgni
–
–
–
CarTiresSql
–
–
–
Car Passing
–
–
–
Car Crash
–
–
–
Siren
–
–
–
Train
–
–
–
Jet Plane
–
B4
–
–
Starship
C5
–
Dog
–
Machine Gun
–
Horse
–
Laser Gun
D4
E4
F4
Fl.KeyClick
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
C5
D5
D5
Bird Tweet
–
Explosion
–
Firework
E5
–
–
F5
–
–
F5
G5
G5
Ghost
–
Maou
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
–
C6
–
–
A5
A5
86
Preset 1 (UK)
CutingNoiz1
C1
4
SFX2
Preset 1 (LK)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
ArabicKit
C1
C1
D1
D1
E1
F1
F1
G1
G1
A1
A1
Preset 1 (LK)
Kick Soft
–
Side Stick
–
Snare Soft
–
Arabic Clap
–
Snare Drum
–
Floor Tom L
–
HH Closed
–
Floor Tom H
–
HH Pedal
–
Low Tom
–
HH Open
–
Preset 1 (UK)
B1
Mid Tom L
–
C2
Mid Tom H
Nakarazan D
–
Crash Cym 1
Cabasa
–
High Tom
Nakarazan E
–
Ride Cym 1
Hager Dom
–
E2
Crash Cym 2
Hager Edge
–
F2
Duhulla Dom
Bongo H
–
Tambourine
Bongo L
–
Duhulla Tak
CongaH Mute
–
CongaH Open
–
Conga L
–
Zagrouda H
–
C2
D2
D2
F2
G2
G2
A2
A2
B2
Zagrouda L
C3
Kick Soft
Katem Dom
Side Stick
Katem Tak
Snare Soft
Katem Sak
Arabic Clap
Katem Tak
E3
Snare Drum
Doff Tak
F3
Floor Tom L
Tabla Dom
HH Closed
Tabla Tak 1
Floor Tom H
Tabla Tik
HH Pedal
Tabla Tak 2
Low Tom
Tabla Sak
HH Open
Tabla Roll
B3
Mid Tom L
Tabla Flam
C4
Mid Tom H
Sagat 1
Crash Cym 1
Tabel Dom
High Tom
Sagat 3
Ride Cym 1
Tabel Tak
E4
Crash Cym 2
Sagat 2
F4
Duhulla Dom
Rik Dom
Tambourine
Rik Tak 2
Duhulla Tak
Rik Finger1
Cowbell
Rik Tak 1
Duhulla Sak
Rik Finger2
Claves
Rik Tremolo
C3
D3
D3
F3
G3
G3
A3
A3
C4
D4
D4
F4
G4
G4
A4
A4
B4
C5
D5
D5
E5
F5
–
Doff Dom
C5
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Preset 2 (PK)
Rik Sak
–
Rik Tik
–
–
–
–
F5
G5
G5
A5
A5
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
–
C6
–
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
87
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your
original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The
User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the Keyboard
Percussion [1] or [2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
1
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
The Keyboard Percussion display appears.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
[Page 1] Keyboard Percussion Display
<KBP1>
¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder
2
Select “User 1” here.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select “User 1.”
<KBP1>
¿USER1 KIT÷Wonder
3
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
⁄
Select the desired percussion kit.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the kit.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93.
<KBP1>
¿USER1 KIT÷EL
88
⁄
⁄
4
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.
<KBP1>
¿USER1 KIT÷EL
⁄
[Page 3] Keyboard Percussion Display
1
3
¿<CYMBAL>
[SET]‹
¿01:Crash Cym 1[CLR]
2
4
4
In this Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.
Category
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1
This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93.
2
Instrument Names
The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with
the appropriate [A] – [D] buttons.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93.
3
Set
Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following
explanation in step 7.)
4
Clear
This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in
two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the
following explanation on page 91.)
5
Select the desired percussion group.
Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the category.
¿<BASS DRUM>
¿01:BD light
[SET]‹
[CLR]
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
89
6
Select the desired instruments.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select instrument.
¿<BASS DRUM>
¿02:BD Heavy
NOTE
7
Though eight User
Keyboard Percussion
setups can be created, they
cannot be memorized to
Registration Memory. Only
on/off data and the
Keyboard Percussion Menu
are memorized to
Registration Memory.
4
[SET]‹
[CLR]
To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal.
Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to [Set] and
press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The currently
displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you press down as a part of User
1.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
¿<BASS DRUM>
¿02:BD Heavy
[SET]‹
[CLR]
1. While holding down [B] button...
2. Press the key.
8
90
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your
own User Keyboard Percussion set.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to the [Clear] in the display
and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
(A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.)
¿<BASS DRUM>
¿02:BD Heavy
[SET]‹
[CLR]
Press the [D] button…
Press the key.
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved.
To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments in Page 3 of the Keyboard Percussion display.
1
Press, then release the [D] button corresponding to [CLEAR] in
the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. You
can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding
to [Cancel].
¿<BASS DRUM>
¿02:BD Heavy
2
[SET]‹
[CLR]
Press the [C] button to erase all data. When the [C] button is
pressed, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the
display.
The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when
you switch to another display.
≤Clear assignments?≤
≤[Clear]
[Cancel]≤
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
91
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
2
4
Press the Keyboard Percussion button.
Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired User number.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
<KBP1>
¿USER1 KIT÷Wonder
⁄
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
92
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Kit Assign List
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SFX
Laser Beam
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle
NATURE
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream
DAILY
Footsteps
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Alarm Bell
CuckooClock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause
PERCUSSION
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
Tom 1
Tom 2
Snare
Snare Roll
HH Closed
HH Open
Cymbal
Tambourine
FingerSnaps
Castanet
Triangle M
Triangle O
Woodblock L
Woodblock H
Handclap
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
VEHICLE
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
Car Engine
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
ANIMAL
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Rooster
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2
EL Drum Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Crash Cym M
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
Orch Cym
OrchCymRoll
Orch Cym M
Cym March
Cym BrShot
Tam-Tam
HIHAT
HH Open
HH Close
HH Pedal 1
HH Pedal 2
Analog HH O
Analog HH C
SNARE DRUM
SD Light
SD Heavy
SD Rim 1
SD Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth SD
Orch SD
SD Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
SD BrShot 1
SD BrShot 2
SD BrRoll
TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
TomBrShot 1
TomBrShot 2
TomBrShot 3
TomBrShot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
BD Light
BD Heavy
BD Attack
Synth BD
BD March
Concert BD
Analog BD S
Analog BD L
CONGA/BONGO
Conga H
Conga L
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo H
Bongo L
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute
CUICA/SURDO
Cuica H
Cuica M
Cuica L
Tamborim O
Tamborim M
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
TIMBALE/COWBELL
Timbale 1 H
Timbale 1 L
Timbale 2 H
Timbale 2 L
Timbale 3 H
Timbale 3 L
Timbale 4 H
Timbale 4 L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
PERCUSSION 1
BASS DRUM
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas H
Maracas L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock M
WoodBlock L
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 2
Agogo H
Agogo L
Triangle O
Triangle M
WindbellDwn
Windbell Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Perc.
PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare
4
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Wonderland Kit
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
93
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
SnareTightH
SnareSoft 2
Snare Roll
SideStick L
OpRimShot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open 2
HH Closed 2
HH Pedal 2
SNARE DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
TOM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
HybridTom 1
HybridTom 2
HybridTom 3
HybridTom 4
HybridTom 5
HybridTom 6
BASS DRUM
KickTight H
Kick Wet
KickTight L
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
94
Hit Kit
SnareAmbien
SnareTight2
Snr Electro
Snare Roll
StickAmbien
Snare Pitch
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
TOM
4
Metro.Bell
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
TambourineL
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Room Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
SnareSnappy
SnrTightSnp
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Rock Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
Snare Rock
SnRockTight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
BASS DRUM
TOM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
TOM
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Electro Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
SnareNoisy2
SnareNoisy3
SnrSnapElec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cym
TOM
TomElectro1
TomElectro2
TomElectro3
TomElectro4
TomElectro5
TomElectro6
BASS DRUM
KickGateHvy
Kick Gate
Kick 3
PERCUSSION1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Analog Kit
CYMBAL
CrashAnalog
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
Hat Open An
Hat CloseAn
HatCloseAn2
SNARE DRUM
SnareAnalog
SnareAnlg 2
SnareNoisy4
Snare Roll
SideStickAn
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cym
TOM
TomAnalog 1
TomAnalog 2
TomAnalog 3
TomAnalog 4
TomAnalog 5
TomAnalog 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
KickAnlgSht
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
CongaAnlg M
CongaAnlg L
CongaAnlg H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
CowbellAnlg
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Jazz Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
SnareJazz L
SnareJazz M
SnareJazz H
Snare Roll
SideStick L
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BrushSlap 3
Brush Tap 2
BrushSlap 2
Snare Roll
SideStick L
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
BASS DRUM
TOM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
TOM
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
BASS DRUM
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
95
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
Symphony Kit
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cym 2
Splash Cym
Chinese Cym
Hand Cym S
HandCym 2 S
RideCym Cup
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Band Snare
BandSnare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
OpenRimShot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Br TapSwirl
TOM
96
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
GranCassa M
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
SambaWhis.H
SambaWhis.L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
JingleBells
Bell Tree
Triangle O
Triangle M
WoodBlock H
WoodBlock L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metro.Click
Metro.Bell
SFX1
SFX
CutingNoiz1
CutingNoiz2
String Slap
Fl.KeyClick
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
SFX2
SFX 1
Phone Call
Phone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
SFX 2
CarEngnIgni
CarTiresSql
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Arabic Kit
ARABIC 1
Nakarazan D
Nakarazan E
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak
ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger1
Rik Finger2
Rik Tremolo
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Ride Cym 1
HH Open
HH Closed
HH Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
CongaH Open
Conga L
CongaH Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
5 Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a
professional. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD,
conveniently allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you're
playing—simply by pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are
conveniently located at the top right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press
the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.
Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch. All Registrations in
Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash memory.
Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration
Memory buttons [1] – [8], with additional Registration Memory presets 9 – 16 which can also
be called up easily. You can of course record your own Registration settings to a numbered
button, but keep in mind that the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and
erased. You can recall the original factory preset settings (and delete your own) by
initializing the Registration Memory.
Registration Memory
5
Basic Registration
No.
1
Image
No.
Image
Strings ensemble
9
Big band jazz
2
Brass ensemble
10
Rock band
3
Woodwind ensemble
11
Fun time
4
Orchestra
12
Synth pop
5
Flute combo
13
Pop organ
6
Piano ballad
14
Cathedral
7
Jazz combo
15
Synth bell
8
Pop ballad
16
Music box
1 Storing Registrations
Your newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory
panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash
memory.
1
Create your original Registration by making all desired panel
settings.
Reference Pages
Selecting a Voice (page 25)
Selecting a Rhythm (page
56)
Voice Controls and Effects
(page 40)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
97
2
While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish
to save your Registration.
1. While holding down [M.] button...
2. Press desired numbered button.
When the Registration is stored, the LED above the numbered the numbered
button flashes momentarily.
Although the ELB-01 has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen
Registrations can be stored. To store Registrations 9 – 16, simultaneously hold
down both the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section and the
[M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory, and press the desired
numbered button (in this case, indicated as [1] – [8]) to which you wish to save
your Registration. When the Registration is stored, the numbered button’s LED
flashes momentarily
5
Registration Memory
Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved.
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
• Pitch (page 150)
• MIDI Control settings (page 161)
• LCD related settings (page 19)
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File);
(page 124)
98
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and
cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Transpose (page 150)
• Registration Shift (page 102)
• Auto Fill setting (page 60)
• Reverb type (page 48)
• User rhythms (page 64)
• User Keyboard Percussion (page 92)
• Rhythm Sequences (page 75)
• Disable setting (page 99)
2 Selecting Registrations
Simply press the numbered button ([1] – [8]) that corresponds to the Registration you
wish to select. (The selected button’s LED lights.)
To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, simultaneously hold down the [VOICE
DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section and press the appropriate numbered
button. (For Registrations 9 – 16, the LEDs do not light.)
Example: Calling up Registration Number 11
Corresponding Registration Memory Number
9
10
11 12
13
14
15 16
5
press the desired numbered button.
Registration Memory
While holding down
the [VOICE DISPLAY] button,
You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right
footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 102).
Using the [D.] (Disable) button:
Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change
when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times during
your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you
make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows you
to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout
all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to.
When the [D.] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when
you change the Registration Memory number.
[D.] (Disable) button
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
99
3 Initializing Registration Memory
If you want to restore the original factory-programmed Registration Memory presets,
you can initialize the Electone settings. Keep in mind that this deletes any of your
custom Registration Memory and LCD Display settings. Always save your important
data to external media, such as USB flash memory.
When turning the power on after initializing the Electone, the preset settings will be
recalled and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the
factory defaults.
For details on how to initialize the Electone, refer to “Factory Set (Initializing the
Electone)” on page 20.
4
5
Reference Page
Songs (page 116)
Saving the Registration data to USB flash
memory
You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as
USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations stored to a single file.
Registration Memory
For details about using other external storage devices, see Chapter 6, Music Data
Recorder (M.D.R.). The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data
to a USB flash memory.
Reference Page
USB TO DEVICE terminal
(page 151)
1
2
Insert the USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [MDR] button.
The MDR display appears.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
100
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
⁄
[Õ]
3
Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data
(page 111).
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿ ___:new song
4
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.
The Registration Save Page is displayed.
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿ ___:new song
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
___:new song ¸:__
Press the [B] button corresponding to the [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes. Your Registration
Memory settings are saved to the external storage device, with sixteen
Registrations stored to a single file.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
___:new song ¸:__
5
Registration Memory
5
Reference Pages
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 131)
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 122)
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
101
5 Registration Shift
The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations
without taking your hands from the keyboards.
By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified
Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric
order or in any order you specify.
You can set the Registration Shift order in the Registration Shift display.
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
5
NOTE
1
Registration Memory
Pressing the
[FOOTSWITCH] button calls
up one of two different
displays, the Registration
Shift Display or Footswitch
Display. These displays can
be switched by pressing the
A button. When you press
the [FOOTSWITCH] button,
the previously selected
display will appear.
Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿OFF
If the Footswitch Page is displayed, press the [A] button to switch to the
Registration Shift Page.
2
102
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These
are set in the Regist Shift display by turning the DATA CONTROL
dial.
Select each in order (Shift → Jump → User) by turning the DATA CONTROL
dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in
the reverse order. The [C] button can also be used to select the modes.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿OFF
1 OFF
2 SHIFT
3 JUMP
4 USER
1
Off
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations
cannot be changed by using the Right Footswitch.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿OFF
2
Shift
5
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿SHIFT
Registration Memory
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration
Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached,
the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The LEDs of
numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the
numbered buttons’ LEDs do not light up if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected.
1˘ 2
Next Registration
3
Jump
Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then select the Jump
“destination” with the DATA CONTROL dial or [D] button.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿JUMP REGIST÷ 1
Registration number of the destination
4
User
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations
according to the order you’ve specified. You can also specify an end point for the
Registration Shift function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be
set in Page 1 of the Registration Shift display.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
⁄
MODE¿USER
END÷STOP
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
103
To set the User Registration order:
1
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
⁄
MODE¿USER
END÷STOP
¸<REG.SHIFT>
T: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
[INS]¤
[DEL]
Enter the Registration Number
NOTE
When you want to set
Registration Memory 9 – 16,
press the desired numbered
button while holding down
the [VOICE DISPLAY]
button. (The Voice display
appears.) Press the
[FOOTSWITCH] button to
call up Page 2 of the
Registration Shift display.
5
Registration Memory
2
Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
3
Press the [B] button corresponding to the [INS] (Insert) in the
display.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
T: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
[INS]¤
[DEL]
Flashing cursor indicates the data entry position.
4
The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that
the Registration is entered.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
T: 3 ~ ~ ~ ~
5
104
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
[INS]¤
[DEL]
Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the
Registration order.
Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be memorized.
Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] button or DATA CONTROL
dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using the [B] and [D] buttons.
Insert the number
¸<REG.SHIFT>
T: 3 2 5 ~ ~
Move the cursor position
[INS]¤
[DEL]
Delete the number
Data Entry Position: Flashing cursor indicates the current data entry
position.
If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the
DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to
the right, turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current
cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the data entry position to a
numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and
press the [B] button corresponding to [INS] (Insert) in the display. The new
Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to
the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s
capacity of 80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Cannot insert
additional data” message appears and the operation cannot be executed.
Delete: Use the [D] button.
To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and
press the [D] button corresponding to [DEL] (Delete) in the display.
NOTE
Registration data cannot be
added or deleted the when
the cursor position is at the
“T” (found at the lower left of
the screen) after inputting
the number. Add or delete
the data after moving the
cursor by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial clockwise.
5
Registration Memory
Insert: Use the [B] button.
This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the
Registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor position.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the
[B] button corresponding to [INS] (Insert) in the display. The entered
Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using [INS] to
enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers.
NOTE
Up to six Registration
numbers can be displayed
at once in the LCD; however,
screen scrolling is enabled
when five or more
Registration numbers are
input. Turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counterclockwise to scroll back
toward the beginning.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
105
Shift End:
Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function.
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 1.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to change the setting.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿USER
END÷STOP
STOP
TOP
NEXT
Stop: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.
Top: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the
sequence over again from the beginning.
5
Reference Page
Registration Memory
Saving Two or More
Registration Banks to One
Song (page 126)
NOTE
In order to playback a song
on the MDR used by the
next Registration, press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button (not
the [CUSTOM PLAY]
button), then start the MDR.
106
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Next Regist: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is
called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are
saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more
than sixteen Registrations.
The Shift End mark (¯: Top, N: Next) will automatically be put at the end of the
Registrations you entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End.
6 Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone
that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory
device or other external media. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to perform various other
operations to your song data (such as copy, delete and convert).
Before purchasing any USB storage device, you should check with your Yamaha dealer or an
authorized Yamaha distributor for advice on compatibility.
Copy
Song data
Delete
USB flash memory
Convert
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
By installing the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive to the ELB-01, you can play songs stored to floppy
disks. For information on how to install the UD-FD01, see page 167. Keep in mind, however, that you cannot
save special Protected Original Songs or the Protected Edit Songs to floppy disks. For details about these
protected songs, see page 139.
Before using a USB device, read through the important section “Precautions when using the USB TO
DEVICE terminals” on page 155. About USB devices compatible with the Electone, see “Compatible USB
devices” on page 155.
To protect your data (write-protect switch):
Some USB flash memory devices are equipped with a write-protect switch. To prevent accidental erasure of
important data saved in USB flash memory, slide the write-protect switch on the device to the “protect”
position. When saving data, make sure that the write-protect switch is set to the “overwrite” position.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
107
1 Using the M.D.R. Function
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations
related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done
in the M.D.R. display.
NOTE
If you press the [MDR]
button even when no media
is inserted into the USB TO
DEVICE terminal, the
selection “Internet” appears
at the bottom of the display.
However, the Internet
function is not available.
MDR Display
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
⁄
[Õ]
The M.D.R. display consists of thirteen display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a
specific function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the
appropriate Page. (For example, select Page 4 to change the name of the recorded song,
or Page 8 to recall the recorded registrations.)
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open
exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press
the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display.
After executing operations such as deleting or converting songs, make sure to return to
Page 1 (Song Select display).
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Display
108
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Page Function
Page 1
Song Select
Select a song.
Page 2
Playback Setting
Set the playback tempo or order.
Page 3
Part
Set the recording status for Lead or KBP.
Page 4
Rename
Change the name of a song/folder.
Page 5
Copy
Copy a song.
Page 6
Delete
Delete a song/folder.
Page 7
Convert
Convert the data format.
Page 8
Registration Load
Load Registration data back to the ELB-01.
Page 9
Registration Save
Save Registration data to external media.
Page 10
Registration Delete
Delete Registrations from a song.
Page 11
Create Folder
Create a folder.
Page 12
Format
Format the media.
Page 13
Remain
Check the remaining memory.
2 Formatting External Media
If you find that you are unable to use new, blank USB flash memory/floppy disks or old
ones that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. Formatting
erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data erased by
formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media contains any
important data you wish to keep before executing the operation
1
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
2
Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
3
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
6
⁄
[Õ]
Select the desired media you want to format.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
⁄
[Õ]
To format a USB flash memory device, select “USB xx” (xx indicates the number
of the device). If you insert two media/devices, the media inserted first will be
shown as “USB 01” and the latter one will be shown as “USB 02.”
Select the desired media by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successive
pressing of the [C] button when the desired media is not displayed
NOTE
By installing the optional
UD-FD01 floppy disk drive
to the ELB-01, you can
format floppy disks. Floppy
disks will be shown in the
display as “USB-FDxx” (xx
indicates the number of the
disk).
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
109
4
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 12.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
<FORMAT>
USB 01
⁄
[Õ]
[EXE]⁄¤
Currently selected media name
The Format display appears.
5
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
<FORMAT>
USB 01
[EXE]⁄¤
≤OK to format?
≤
≤[Format] [Cancel]≤
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding to [Cancel].
6
CAUTION
Do not remove the media
while the formatting
operation is in process.
Press the [C] button, corresponding to [Format] in the display, to
format the media.
≤OK to format?
≤
≤[Format] [Cancel]≤
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to Page 12 (Format display).
Simultaneously press the PAGE buttons to return to Page 1 (Song Select
display).
<FORMAT>
USB 01
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
110
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
[EXE]⁄¤
⁄
[Õ]
3 Selecting a Song
In order to record your performance to the media or to load Registrations in the media
back to the Electone, you will need to select a song, as described below.
What is a Song?
Registration data
You can think of a song as a “container” for
storing the Electone data for a piece of music,
recorded to external media. A single song can
contain both the recorded performance and
Registrations.
Performance
data
Song
Reference Page
Media Contents: Folders,
Songs, and Files (page 116)
To record your performance, you will need to specify a Song for recording. To copy or
convert songs, you will need to specify not only the song to be copied or converted but
also the song to which you want to save the newly created data.
To select the desired song:
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then press the
[MDR] button.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
Media icon
CAUTION
6
While the instrument is
accessing data, do NOT
remove the media. (Some
USB flash memory
devices are equipped with
an LED. The LED will flash
while the media is being
accessed.)
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
⁄
[Õ]
Currently selected media
The Song Select display (Page 1) appears.
In the Song Select display, you can select a blank song for recording your
performance or saving the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song
for playback.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
111
2
Select the desired media.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
⁄
[Õ]
To use a USB flash memory device, select “USB xx” (xx indicates the number of
the device). If you insert two USB flash memory devices, the device inserted first
will be shown as “USB 01” and the latter one will be shown as “USB 02.” To use
a floppy disk, select “USB-FD xx” (xx indicates the number of the disk).
Select the desired media by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successive
pressing of the [C] button when the desired media is not displayed.
When selecting the media, the selection “Internet” will appear at the bottom of
the display. However, the Internet function is not available.
3
Select a Song
Press the [D] button corresponding to the [Õ] in the display, to call up the
desired song or folder in the selected media.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
6
⁄
[Õ]
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿ ___:new song
Select the desired song here
If the selected media has no data, “new song” (blank song) will be selected
automatically. If the selected media contains both folders and songs, the folder
will be selected first, and you can use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
following items in sequence: folders → new song → songs (containing data) by
turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. You can also select the song
(folder) by successively pressing the [C] button.
For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a
Folder” on page 113.
112
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Select a “new song” (blank song) if you want to make a new recording or save
data.
NOTE
The new song is a blank
song which is automatically
created in the media/folder,
if the number of the songs in
the media/folder is less than
100.
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿ ___:new song
Reference Page
Recording (page 117)
To simply play an existing song, select the desired song (containing data),
referring to the song name and icons
ÃUSB 01
¿ 001:SONG 1
Reference Pages
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 122)
Song Icons (page 116)
[˜] ⁄
´
Reference Page
Playing Back a Song
(page 132)
Selecting the Song in the Folder:
Keep in mind that, depending on much data stored in your device and how many
folders have been created, the song you want to use may be easily located in the media’s
root directory, or it may be buried deep in the folder hierarchy with other songs.
The illustrations below shows you how to use the display to access a specific song in a
folder of a storage device (in this case, calling up the song “Twinkle Twinkle Little
Star”).
6
The new song is a blank
song which is automatically
created in the media/folder
unless the number of the
songs in the media/folder is
under 100.
FOLDER_002
FOLDER_001
new song
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
NOTE
USB flash memory
(USB 01)
Twinkle
Twinkle
Little Star
new song
SONG 1
The illustration below shows the levels of folders and songs in the device. Follow the
dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired song,
“Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
First level
(root directory)
USB flash memory (USB 01)
1. Press the [D] button
Second level in
the root directory
2. Use the DATA CONTROL dial or the [C] button
FOLDER_001
FOLDER_002
new song
SONG 1
3. Press the [D] button
Third level in the
root directory
4. Use the DATA CONTROL dial or the [C] button
new song
Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star
Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
113
Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form:
1
Press the [D] button to call up the folder in the selected media at
the bottom of the display.
<SONG SELECT>
¿Ã001:USB 01
⁄
[Õ]
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿¶001:FOLDER_001 [Õ]
FOLDER_001 is displayed.
2
Select the FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or
successively pressing the [C] button.
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿¶002:FOLDER_002 [Õ]
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Press the [D] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002 at the
bottom of the display.
In this case, “new song” is displayed.
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿¶002:FOLDER_002 [Õ]
öFOLDER_002
[˜] ⁄
¿ ___:new song
4
Select the desired song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning
the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C]
button.
öFOLDER_002
¿ 001:Twinkle
114
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
[˜] ⁄
´
To change the Media/Folder:
Make sure to select Song Select display (Page 1) when you want to change the media/
folder/song.
3
5
4
öFOLDER_002
[˜] ⁄
¿ 003:FOLDER_003 [Õ]
2
1
1
6
Current media/folder/song
Displays the currently selected media/folder/song. In this case, the folder named
“FOLDER_003” is shown.
2
Changing the current media/folder/song
The current media/folder/song can be selected by turning the DATA CONTROL dial
or by successively pressing the [C] button.
3
Display the entire song name
To show the entire name of the currently selected folder/song (up to 36 characters) in
the display, hold down the [A] button.
4
Upper level folder or media
6
5
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
This shows the upper level folder/media which contains the currently selected folder/
song. The media icon (Ã) and the folder icon (¶) shown at the top left of the display
indicates the current location in the media. For example, “öFOLDER_002”
indicates that the folder named “FOLDER_002” in the root directory of the media.
For folders deeper in the hierarchy (lower than the third level), the folder icon
“Ã...¶” is shown.
Move to upper level
Select the upper level by pressing the [B] button.
If you are at a level lower than the second level, you can instantly jump back to the first
level by holding down the [B] button (for more than two seconds).
6
Move to lower level
Select the lower level by pressing the [D] button.
If a song is selected, [Õ] is not shown in the display.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
115
Song Icons
These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song.
Icons
Description
Ã
¶
Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or a floppy disk.
Indicates a Protected Song unavailable for editing. See page
139 for details.
À
Indicates a Protected Song available for editing.
˛
Indicates a song that has been converted from a song in media
for which write-protect or copy-protect is effective. For details,
see “Converting EL format to ELB” on page 142.
´
Indicates that the performance data is contained in the song.
Indicates a folder.
E001:SONG 1
Indicates a song that has been created with an EL-series
Electone, such as the EL-900 or EL-100.
X001:XGSONG001
Indicates an XG song.
Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in
groups.
If you've saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory device, it may be difficult
to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar
songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier
to find the songs you want.
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Song
1
Song
2
Song
3
Song
4
Song
5
Song
6
Song 1 2
Folder 001
Creating folders
Song
Song
Song
USB flash memory
3
Song 4 5
6
Folder 002
USB flash memory
Songs:
A song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded
to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance and
Registrations. A blank song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.”
When a song containing the performance data is selected, a note icon (´) appears in
the display.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various
files, such as Registration files and performance files.The file types listed below are
created with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the Electone display.
They will, however, be displayed on a computer.)
116
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Files in the song
File
Explanation
Extension
Performance
data
This file contains performance data, played on the
keyboards and pedals of the Electone.
.mid
Registration
data
This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User
rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
.b00
XG-converted
data
This file contains XG song data, for which Electone
performance data is converted to XG-compatible format.
.mid
4 Recording
Recording
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording. Set
the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in
Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at
the beginning of the song
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Select the blank song (new song) for recording your
performance.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿ ___:new song
3
4
5
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
2
6
NOTE
When you record the song
using the Next Regist
function, make sure to press
the [PLAY/PAUSE] button
before pressing the
[RECORD] button. For
details, see page 129.
Press the [RECORD] button.
The lamp above the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the Electone is
ready to record.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
The lamp above the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small arrow
indicator flashes across from left to right at the top right of the LCD display.
This indicates that the M.D.R. is reading the registrations.
After “REC~~” appears at the top right of the LCD display, begin
playing.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
117
CAUTION
6
Do not remove the media
from the instrument during
recording (while the
message is shown).
7
When you finish playing, press the [STOP] button.
Recording stops and your performance is written to the song.
The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named
“SONG xx” (xx indicates the number). You can change the song name as
desired. (For details, see page 122.)
To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button.
Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the
Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related
functions, see page 132.
Re-recording (Retry)
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the
beginning.
1
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
2
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button while the song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
song. The lamp above the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts flashing, indicating that
you can re-record the song.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously
recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
Recording Each Part Separately
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets
you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration
changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice can be recorded separately. The following
instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower
and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard.
1
118
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 117 to call up the Rec Standby
display.
2
Select the parts for recording.
Each press of a part button switches the status: Play (green LED), Off (LED is
off ) and Rec (red LED). Press each part button to turn off the parts you don’t
want to record, and make sure the green LED is lit for the parts you want to play
and the red lit for the part you want to record.
Play (green LED):
Playback of parts that have been recorded.
Off (LED is off ):
Recording or playback is not active.
Record (red LED):
Recording of the part.
To record the performances on the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard, turn off the
LED above the [UPPER] button, and make sure that the red LEDs above the
[LOWER] button and the [PEDAL] button are lit, as shown in the lower
illustration above.
4
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “REC~~” appears at the top
right of the LCD display, begin playing.
6
Press the [Stop] button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case.
5
6
Press the [RECORD] button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. To overwrite, press the
[C] button corresponding to [OK] in the display.
Select the parts for recording.
Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “Rec” (red
LED). Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts)
to “Play” (green LED), so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you
record new ones.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
119
7
Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new
part or parts.
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM
PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for
recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback.
While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the
Upper Keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically
stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of
the previously recorded parts.
NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make
sure that the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] and/or [2]
button is set to on.
6
Separately recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard
Percussion parts:
The Lead voice and the Keyboard Percussion can be recorded/played back
separately although there are no buttons for these parts. Set these in the display
shown in step 2 on page 119.
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.
<PART>
LEAD÷PLAY‹
XG VOL.¿100 KBP÷OFF
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the status for the Lead Voice.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the status for Keyboard Percussion.
You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “Rec” at the same time; neither can the
Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts be recorded at the same time.
120
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Punch-in Recording
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This lets you re-record over a specific phrase or section—either that of a specific part(s)
or all parts.
2
3
4
5
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the song.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
The current song is stopped momentarily.
Press the [RECORD] button.
The lamp above the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the M.D.R. is
ready to record.
6
Set the parts which you want to change to “Rec” status and other
parts to “Play.”
7
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play
the new phrase, as you want it to be changed.
8
Press the [STOP] button to quit the punch-in recording as soon
as you reach the end of the phrase.
NOTE
This function is best used
when the phrase to be rerecorded has definite
beginning and end points,
with slight pauses before
and after.
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
121
5 Changing the Song/Folder Name
Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded song,
it’s best to give each song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or even a date
indicating when it was recorded.
1
2
Select the song/folder whose name you want to change.
For details on selecting a song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Rename display (Page 4).
The Rename display appears.
<RENAME>
[EXE] ›
« 001:SONG
1
»
_
NOTE
A blank song cannot be
named. Once a song
contains data, it can be
named.
Cursor
4
6
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [C] [D] buttons.
Pressing the [D] button moves the cursor one step to the right, while pressing
the [C] button moves it to the left
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
<RENAME>
[EXE] ›
« 001:SONG
»
_ 1
Cursor
5
Change the character at the cursor position.
Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for
reverse order.
<RENAME>
[EXE] ›
« 001:SONH
»
_ 1
122
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Blank
A – Z (capital)
a – z (lower case)
Japanese Katakana:
NOTE
If “English” is selected as
the Language in the Utility
display (page 19),
Japanese katakana
characters are unavailable.
Marks
Number 0 – 9
To delete a character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button
while holding down the [A] button.
When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are
moved one step to the left.
To insert a space:
Move the cursor to the position at which you want to enter the space, and press
the [D] button while holding down the [A] button.
7
8
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
6
6
Repeat steps 4 through step 5 above to finish entering the song
name.
Up to 36 characters can be entered.
After finishing, press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE]
(Execute) in the display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.
To actually enter the change, press the [C] button corresponding
to [Rename] in the display.
≤Rename?
≤[Rename]
≤
[Cancel]≤
The renamed song/folder is displayed.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
123
An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C]
button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and
you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used. (The
letters “xx” indicate numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT
MDR_xx.MID
MDR_xx.Bxx
MDR_xx.Vxx
SONG.NAM
6
Reference Page
Functions and settngs that
cannot be memorized (page
98)
6
ELS_SONG.NAM
MDR_xxx.MID
REG_xxx.B00
SONG_xxx.C02
MDR_xxx.TMP
REG_xxx.TMP
ELS_SONG.TMP
TMP
TMP.E02
Saving Registrations as Registration Data
(File)
You can also record Registrations by themselves to a song, without having to record
them along with a performance. All Registrations 1 – 16 stored to the Registration
Memory buttons as well as the Registration Shift settings and so on can be saved to the
song. Even if you’ve only created a couple of Registrations yourself, 16 separate
Registration Memory settings are always stored when saving to a song—the factory
preset Registrations being stored if no new settings have been made to the numbers.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Registrations 1 – 16 stored
to the numbered buttons are
saved together as a bank
Save
Registrations
There are two ways to save the Registrations.
Method 1
124
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
1
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
2
First make all the desired Electone settings to create your
original Registration.
3
4
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank song).
Select the blank song. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page
112.
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
___:new song ¸:__
5
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved.
After the message disappears, the song to which the Registration is recorded is
automatically named “SONG xx” (“xx” indicates the number).
Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 122)
Method 2
First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select
the destination (blank song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above.
2
Press the [RECORD] button to enable recording on the M.D.R.
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
3
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then
press the [STOP] button before the “REC~~” indication is shown
at the top right of the display.
This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The
“REC~~” at the top right of the display indicates that the M.D.R. is recording
the Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP]
button interrupts this process.
ÃUSB 01
»~~ ⁄
¿ ___:new song
ÃUSB 01
REC~~⁄
¿ ___:new song
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
125
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
When you save the Registrations, Registrations 1 – 16 will be saved as a Registration
bank. When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers in a song, you can
save additional Registration banks—up to a maximum of 50 in a single song—with the
following procedure.
R:01 Registration
1
2
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3
4
5
6
7
8
Registrations Bank
Add
R:02 Registration to be added
1
2
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3
4
Song
7
8
1
2
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3
4
1
First make all the desired settings you want to save.
6
2
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
4
6
...
...
R:50 Registration to be added
5
5
6
7
8
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination song (the one
that already contains the previous Registrations).
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
Any Registration banks previously been saved to the song are indicated in the
display (as “¸÷01” or similar).
5
Select the blank Registration bank “¸÷__” to which you want to
save the additional Registration bank, by using the DATA
CONTROL dial.
You can also select the blank bank by successively pressing the [D] button.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
001:SONG 1
¸÷__
126
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
If you select a numbered bank, such as “01” instead of “_ _”, this procedure will
overwrite the numbered bank. For details, see step 6 of “Replacing Registrations” on
page 128.
6
Reference Page
Files (page 116)
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
The Registration bank will be added and follows previously contained banks.
When you play back this song, the top Registration in this display will be loaded
to the Electone.
Replacing Registrations
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without
changing the performance data.
First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new
Registration.
2
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
3
4
Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired song
containing the Registration you wish to replace.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
Reference Page
Song Icons (page 116)
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.
The Registration bank number will be shown at the bottom right of the display.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
Registration
5
Select the Registration bank number you wish to overwrite by
using the DATA CONTROL dial.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
127
6
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.
7
Press the [C] button corresponding to [OK] in the display to
overwrite (replace).
Deleting Registrations
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This function lets you delete the Registration banks saved to a song.
1
2
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, and then select the song containing the
Registrations you wish to delete.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Registration Delete display
(Page 10).
The Registration Delete display appears.
<REG.DEL>
[EXE]⁄‚
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
4
Select the Registration bank number you want to delete by using
the DATA CONTROL dial.
You can also select the Registration bank number by successively pressing the
[D] button.
<REG.DEL>
[EXE]⁄‚
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
128
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
5
6
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.
Press the [C] button corresponding to [Delete] in the display to
delete the Registration.
When several Registrations are stored to a song, the Registrations following the
deleted one are moved back to replace it in the order
Next Regist Settings (Using more than 16 Registrations
in one song)
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using a bank of 16 Registrations, you can
program a maximum of 80 settings to be recalled in a specified order, with the Regist
Shift function described on page 106.
When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can
have two or more Registration banks saved to a single song and recall them one by one
as you play the song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Regist.
MEMORY
MEMORY
MEMORY
1
16
1
16
R:01
1
2
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
MEMORY
R:02
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next as the
Shift End in Page 1 of the Registration Shift display. In Page 2, set
the Use Registration order.
For details, see “Registration Shift” on page 103.
3
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination song.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
4
Save the Registrations.
Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.
<REG.SAVE>
[EXE] ·
___:new song ¸:__
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved.
After the message disappears, the song to which the Registration is recorded is
automatically named “SONG xx” (“xx” indicates the number).
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
129
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to save the Registration banks in
the order you want to recall them in the same song. When making
new Registration Shift setting, delete the previous settings, then
continue.
For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song” on
page 126.
Once the Next Regist function has been turned on and set, you can use the function,
following the steps below.
6
7
6
NOTE
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
While a rhythm is playing,
sequence data and User
rhythm in the Registration
data created on the
Electone such as ELS-01/
01C/01X cannot be loaded.
8
Press the [MDR] button, and select the song for which the Next
Regist function has been set.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting Songs.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one (¸:01) will
be loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the Registration
Shift display.
As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order
you’ve specified.
After finishing the play back of the “¸:01,” the next Registration bank “¸:02”
begins loading automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right
Footswitch.
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
When you record or play the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to load
the top Registration bank (R:01) to the Electone by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE]
button after selecting the desired song. If you begin the recording procedure instead
by pressing the [RECORD] button, even as another bank (R:02, etc.) is loading,
R:01 is overwritten by the current panel settings and will be lost.
130
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
7 Recalling Recorded Registrations
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to
the Electone. Use this function if you want to recall a specific Registration bank
(R:02~) from a song which contains more than two Registration banks
Loading Registrations
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
2
3
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [MDR] button and select the song containing the
Registrations you want to load back to the Electone.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Registration Load display
(Page 8).
<REG.LOAD>
[EXE] °
001:SONG 1
¸÷01
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4
6
Select the Registration bank you want to load to the Electone.
Select the desired Registration bank number by turning the DATA CONTROL
dial.
<REG.LOAD>
[EXE] °
001:SONG 1
¸÷02
5
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being loaded.
After the Registration data is loaded, the LCD returns to the Registration Load
display.
NOTE
If you load a Registration
while a rhythm is playing,
User rhythms in the
Registration data cannot be
loaded.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
131
8 Playing Back a Song
This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a song when
playing back your recorded performances.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Loading the 16
Registrations to the
numbered buttons on
the panel.
Load
Registrations
Song
1
2
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Reference Page
4
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Play back
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired song for
playback.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to load the Registration data.
“»~~” appears at the top right of the display, indicating the Registration data is
currently being loaded.
If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be
loaded.
Saving Two or More
Registration Banks to One
Song (page 126)
132
Performance
data
Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data.
The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and song playback starts (if the
song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the song are
played back; however, you can mute specific parts and playback only selected
parts (page 133). When the end of the recorded performance is reached,
playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of
the song by pressing the [STOP] button. If the song contains no performance
data, after loading the Registration data, the LCD returns to the Song Select
display.
Custom Play
If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the
[CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This displays the
song time and starts playback immediately.
When you play the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.
Playing Back the Selected Part(s)
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts
are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part,
such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
To play back the selected part(s):
Before or during playback, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback
to “Play” and the part you want to mute to “Off.”
Reference Page
Recording Each Part
Separately (page 118)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
133
Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Fast Forward and Rewind:
During playback, press the [FF] (Fast forward) button or [REW] (Rewind) button and
hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. When the button is released,
playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve
advanced or reversed to, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button or [CUSTOM PLAY]
button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused,
press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again or press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.
Changing the Tempo
6
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display,
either while the song is stopped or while it is playing. The TEMPO buttons on the
panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder.)
To Change the Tempo:
1
Press the [MDR] button.
The Song Select display appears.
2
Select the song to be played back.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Playback Setting display
(Page 2).
The tempo value is shown at the bottom left of the display
<PLAYBACK SETTING> ¤
TMP¿100% RPT÷OFF
4
134
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Changing the Tempo.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range is 50 – 200%. The original
recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo, while
values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
Repeat Playback
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one
specific song.
1
2
Select the song you wish to repeatedly play back.
If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be
played back. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Playback Setting display
(Page 2).
The Repeat mode is shown at the bottom right of the display.
<PLAYBACK SETTING> ¤
TMP¿100% RPT÷OFF
1 OFF
2 ALL
3 SINGLE
4 RANDOM
6
1
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Select the repeat mode.
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
Off
Cancels repeat playback.
2
All
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order.
3
Single
Repeats the currently selected song indefinitely.
4
Random
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly.
3
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback.
When you stop playback, the repeat setting is automatically cancelled.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
135
Playing Back XG Songs
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Reference Page
Converting to XG format
(page 144)
The Electone allows you to playback XG song data, created on the computer or
converted from Electone song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast
forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with songs (performances) recorded on the
Electone.
1
2
3
Insert the media containing the XG song data, then press the
[MDR] button.
Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the Song
Select display, and then select the desired song for playback.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.
You can set the volume or mute settings for each part.
ALL
CH1
CH2
...
6
1
CH16
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
<PART>¿ALL
VOL.¿100
2
÷PLAY‹
3
1
Part
Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part
to mute/play or to change the volume.
Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
2
Playback/Off
Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off ). Select “Play” for the part you
want to play back and select “Off ” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B]
button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the setting.
3
Volume
You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100.
Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
The item “Volume” will be changed to “XG Volume” when the selected song
contains an XG part, even when the song has been created on the ELB-01 or
EL-900. You can adjust the XG part volume from Page 3, in the same way as you
did with the XG songs.
136
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
9
Song Copy/Delete/Convert,
Folder Create/Delete
These operations let you copy, delete or convert song data, as well as create or delete
folders.
Song Copy
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This function lets you copy recorded data from one song to another song. Songs
created with the ELS-01/01C/01X or XG songs can be copied. (Only songs created
with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) This function also lets you
copy and exchange data between two different media.
Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If
memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs, Song Copy is
not available.
2
3
Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
If you want to copy the song between two different media, you will need to
insert the appropriate destination media.
6
Press the [MDR] button, then select the song to be copied.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
1
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Copy display (Page 5).
<COPY>
[EXE] fi
001:SONG 1
4
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
<COPY>
[EXE] fi
001:SONG 1
<COPY DEST>
[˜] fi
¿ ___:new song [EXE]
The Copy Destination display appears.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
137
5
Select the destination song.
<COPY DEST>
[˜] fi
¿ ___:new song [EXE]
The new song or the folder that contains the source song will be automatically
displayed at the bottom of the display as the destination. If the folder is
displayed, select the new song. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on
selecting songs.
If you want to copy an XG song, you’ll need to select another folder as the
destination, since the same folder containing the source XG song cannot be
selected as the destination. If the remaining memory of the destination media is
insufficient, XG Song Copy cannot be executed. (An error message will appear
and the operation is cancelled.) Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder
About Copying Protected Songs
Reference Page
About Protected Songs
(page 139)
6
Protected Original songs or Protected Edit songs can be copied as long as you select
the same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you
select another folder/media, the message “Move?” will be displayed. If you select
[OK] by pressing the [C] button, the currently selected Protected Original song and
Protected Edit song created from a Protected Original song are all moved to another
folder/media you have specified. In this case, the data is not copied, but moved.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
6
138
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Press the [D] button to execute Song Copy.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the Copy display.
The name of the destination song is the same as the one of the source song,
except that “*” is attached at the beginning (not including XG songs). For
instructions on changing the song name, see page 122.
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to
prevent accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership).
These are called “Protected songs.” A Protected song can be played back in the same
way as songs you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format or EL format.
Registration data in the Protected song cannot be edited, nor can the performance
data be overwritten. If you want to edit a Protected song, first copy it within one
media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The
copied song (called “Protected Edit song”) is available only when the original song
(called “Protected Original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete
the Protected Original song.
Folder
Protected
Original Song
Protected Edit
Song
Copy
CAUTION
This song can be edited, but only
when it is in the folder that
contains the related
If you move or copy the protected song data on the computer without the
Musicsoft Downloader application, the song cannot be played back. Always
use the Musicsoft Downloader when moving or copying protected songs on
the computer.
Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
When you want to edit a
protected song, turn the
power to the instrument
off and back on again,
then select the song to be
edited. (The Registration
data of the previous
protected song will be
initialized.) Otherwise the
edited protected song may
not be saved.
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
This song cannot be edited
Song Delete/Folder Delete
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
These operations let you delete songs and folders.
(Only songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.)
1
2
3
Insert the media, then press the [MDR] button.
Select the song/folder you want to delete.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs/folders.
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Delete display (Page 6).
Confirm that the desired song/folder to be deleted is shown at the bottom of the
display.
If you want to change the song, return to Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons
simultaneously, and then select the desired song.
<DELETE>
[EXE] fl
001:SONG 1
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
139
4
5
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.
Press the [C] button to execute the operation.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the Delete display.
To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data, make sure to return to the
Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons simultaneously.
Creating folders
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
6
1
Insert the media, then press the [MDR] button.
2
Select the media/folder in which you want to create the folder,
then press the [D] button.
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Create Folder display (Page
11).
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
<CREATE FLD> [EXE]⁄⁄
4
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
To see the newly created folder, first return to Page 1 by pressing both PAGE
buttons simultaneously, then select the newly created folder.
The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_xxx” (xxx indicates
the number). For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 122.
ÃUSB 01
[˜] ⁄
¿¶001:FOLDER_001 [Õ]
140
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Converting ELB format songs to EL
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can convert songs created on the ELB-01 to the EL-series format, and save them to
a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL900. This function is not available for Protected songs. To use floppy disks with the
Electone, install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive. Make sure to check the
remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is
insufficient, the Convert operation is not available.
1
2
3
Insert the media containing the song created with the Electone,
and the floppy disk as the destination.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the song to be converted to
the EL-series format.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
Reference Page
About Protected Songs
(page 139)
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 167)
NOTE
ELB songs can be used on
Electone models such as
the ELS-01/01C/01X with no
need for conversion.
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7).
<CONV>¿EL
[EXE] ‡
001:SONG 1
´
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4
6
Select the conversion format.
Select “EL” by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the
[A] button.
XG
EL
<CONV>¿EL
[EXE] ‡
001:SONG 1
´
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
141
5
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
<CONV>¿EL
[EXE] ‡
001:SONG 1
´
<CONV DEST>
‡
¿ ___:new song [EXE]
The new song is displayed as the destination in the floppy disk.
When a new song is not displayed, select a new song by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial or successively pressing the [C] button.
6
7
6
Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Press the [C] button corresponding to [Convert] in the display to
start conversion.
After conversion is finished, the LCD returns to the Convert display. The song
converted to EL format is automatically named “EXXX: SONG x” (x indicates
the number).
Converting EL format songs to ELB
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Reference Page
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 167)
NOTE
When converting protected
EL data to the ELB format,
make sure to set the writeprotect tab of the EL disk to
the “overwrite” position (tab
closed).
142
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
You can convert the songs in a floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as
the EL-900, to the ELB-01 format, and save it to a USB flash memory device. The
songs in write-protected or copy-protected media for the EL series can be converted
only one time. To use a floppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy
disk drive. Depending on the original song data, the sound or tempo of the converted
song may differ from the original, and/or the Next Song function of the original song
may not be effective.
Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If
memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available.
1
2
Insert the floppy disk that containing the song you want to
convert to the ELB format, and insert the USB flash memory
device for use as the destination.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the song you want to convert
to ELB format.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7).
4
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
<CONV>:ELB
[EXE] ‡
E001:SONG 1
<CONV DEST>
[˜] ‡
¿ ___:new song [EXE]
6
5
6
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Convert Destination display appears.
Select the blank song as the destination in the USB flash memory
device.
Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.
Press the [C] button corresponding to [Convert] in the display to
start conversion.
After conversion is finished, the LCD returns to the Convert display.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
143
Converting to XG format
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This function allows you to convert ELB-01 song data to XG format data. You can play
back the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may not sound the same
as the original data.
Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If
memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available. Protected songs
cannot be converted to XG format.
1
2
Select the song to be converted to the XG format.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.
Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7).
<CONV>¿EL
[EXE] ‡
001:SONG 1
´
3
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
4
Select the conversion format.
Select “XG” by using the DATA CONTROL dial or successively pressing the
[A] button.
Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
The Convert Destination display appears.
5
Select the blank song as destination.
6
Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the
display.
7
A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted
data. Press the [C] button to play back the data.
≤Check the data.
≤
≤[OK]
[Cancel]≤
After playback is finished, the LCD return to the Convert display. The song
converted to XG format is automatically named “XGSONGxxx” (xxx indicates
the number). For instructions on changing the song name, see page 122.
144
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Checking the Remaining Memory
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can check the remaining memory in the media.
1
Insert the media, and press the [MDR] button.
2
Select the desired media by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by
successively pressing the [C] button.
3
Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 13.
The remaining memory is displayed.
⁄‹
xx.xx MB
6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
<REMAIN>
USB 01
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
145
7 Footswitches
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions
and switch the effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard.
Left Footswitch
The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is
used for the Registration Shift function, while the Left Footswitch can be set to control
one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the
Left Footswitch (in the Footswitch Page) are given here. For details on the Registration
Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on page 102.
Left Footswitch
Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
7
Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button.
Footswitches
NOTE
Pressing the
[FOOTSWITCH] button calls
up one of two different
display pages: the
Footswitch Page or the
Regist Shift Page. Press the
[A] button to alternate
between the two pages.
146
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿OFF
Calls up the Footswitch display.
Pressing the [A] button alternates between the Footswitch Page and Regist Shift
Page.
¸<REG.SHIFT>
MODE¿OFF
Footswitch Page
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿OFF
1 OFF
2 RHYTHM
3 GLIDE
4 ROTARY
SPEAKER
In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control:
Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary speaker. Turning the DATA CONTROL Dial to the
right selects the functions in sequence: Off → Rhythm → Glide → Rotary
speaker. Turning the DATA CONTROL Dial to the left selects in the reverse
order. When Off is selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive.
1
Off
The Left Footswitch will not control any function.
2
7
Rhythm
When this is selected, one of the control settings appears at the right bottom of
the display. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the
DATA CONTROL Dial to select the desired control setting.
Footswitches
2
Reference page
Rhythm Structure (page 58)
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿RHYTHM ÷STOP
2 -1
STOP
2 -2
BREAK
2 -3
MAIN A – D
2 -4
INTRO 1 – 3
2 -5
ENDING 1 – 3
2-1 Stop
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch.
2-2 Break
This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you
press the Left Footswitch, the Break section turns on.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
147
2-3 Main A – Main D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the
panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press
the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.
2-4 Intro 1 – Intro 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.
For example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the
Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.
2-5 Ending 1 – Ending 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.
For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the
Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the
ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops.
3
Glide
This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the
Left Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a
half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
When the Glide setting is chosen, three separate Glide pages are available, with
the current page number shown at the top right side of the display.
You can select the pages by using the PAGE buttons.
Footswitch – Glide Page 1
3 -2
7
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿GLIDE
TIME÷1 ⁄
”LEAD
Footswitches
3 -1
Footswitch – Glide Page 2
3 -1
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿GLIDE
”UPPER1¤
”UPPER2
3 -1
Footswitch – Glide Page 3
3 -1
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿GLIDE
’LOWER1‹
’LOWER2
3 -1
148
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
3-1 Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead
Select the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be
applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons.
3-2 Time
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch
returns when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce slower
pitch changes. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use
the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 1-5
4
Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using the Left Footswitch.
When the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function
corresponds to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this
function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each
Voice section. For details, see page 50.
Reference page
Rotary Speaker (page 50)
7
Footswitches
Ò<FOOT.SW>
MODE¿ROTARY SPEAKER
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
149
8 Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch.
Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the
tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
Currently selected page
<æy∫/LANGUAGE>
⁄
’i-y∫
”ENGLISH
The Utility display appears.
2
Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the PAGE buttons.
<æy∫/LANGUAGE>
⁄
’i-y∫
”ENGLISH
<TRANSPOSE> <PITCH>¤
¿ 0
÷440.0Hz
8
1
2
Transpose and Pitch Controls
In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings by using the [C]
[D] buttons and the DATA CONTROL Dial.
NOTE
The Transpose setting here
is not applicable for XG
songs (page 136).
1 Transpose
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half
steps (semitones). Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use
the DATA CONTROL Dial to change the setting
Range: -6 – +6
2
Pitch
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch
by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL Dial to change the setting
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. (See page 43 for details.)
150
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
9 Connections
On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with
various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are
described below.
1 Accessory Jacks and Controls
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For
details on connecting to external devices, see page 153.
1
2
Reference Pages
1
AUX OUT (L/R) jacks
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output
level is fixed and cannot be controlled.
2
PHONES jack
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this
jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing
you to play without disturbing others.
Playing the Sounds of the
Electone Through an
External Audio System
(page 153)
Recording the Sounds of the
Electone to an External
Recorder (page 154)
Reference Page
Using Headphones
(page 153)
Connections
9
3
Reference Pages
3
USB TO DEVICE A terminal
For connecting USB storage devices (such as Flash Memory).
Connecting USB storage
devices (page 155)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
151
4
5
6
Reference Pages
Controlling External MIDI
Devices from the Electone
(page 154)
Controlling the Electone
from an External Device
(page 155)
Connection with Computer
(page 156)
What is MIDI (page 157)
Reference Page
Connection with Computer
(page 156)
4
MIDI IN/OUT terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use
these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
5
USB TO HOST terminal
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure
that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.
6
USB TO DEVICE B terminal
For connecting USB storage devices (such as Flash Memory).
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting
a computer with peripheral devices.
9
Connections
152
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
2 Connection Examples — External Devices
Before connecting the Electone to other electronic components, turn off the
power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components
on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or
damage to the components may occur.
Using Headphones
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard 1/4" phone jack).
PHONES
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
External Audio System
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
By using the AUX OUT jacks (RCA), you can connect your Electone to external
speakers.
Speaker (Left)
9
R
Connections
AUX OUT L
Speaker (Right)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
153
Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External
Recorder
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can record your Electone performance to an external recorder, such as an MD
recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the AUX OUT jacks.
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
LINE IN L
R
AUX OUT L
R
Audio cable
Recording
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone
generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more
multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must
match the transmit channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note information
as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed
down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device
responds to these messages depends on the particular device.
Tone generator
Reference Page
What is MIDI (page 157)
MIDI IN
NOTE
MIDI OUT
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.
9
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
Connections
154
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Controlling the Electone from an External Device
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of
your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your Electone.)
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
NOTE
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
received.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
Connecting USB storage devices
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices (such
as the USB flash memory) for saving your Electone data.
You can connect up to two USB storage devices (such as a USB flash memory device,
floppy disk, Card-R/RW drive, hard disk and other drives) to the USB TO DEVICE
terminal(s). Before purchasing a USB storage device, please consult your Yamaha
dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice.
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals
• Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB
cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self-powered type.
Doing so may result in the operation of the Electone “freezing” or hanging
up.
• While the instrument is accessing data (such as Save, Load, and Delete
operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media
from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so
may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
Reference Pages
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 167)
Formatting External Media
(page 109)
NOTE
If necessary, use a USB
hub. Only self-powered
(battery or external power
supply) types can be used.
USB hubs of up to two levels
can be used.
9
Connections
Compatible USB devices
• Be careful not to turn the write-protect switch on or off while the USB
device is still connected to the terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction
in the M.D.R. operation since the on/off status may not be recognized
correctly.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
155
3 Connection with Computer
By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect
your Electone to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information
about MIDI, see page 157).
Before you can actually transfer data between the Electone and a computer
via the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver.
Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at
“http://music.yamaha.com/download/.”
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transferred to/from the
computer.
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical
possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score
writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original
Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with
your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by
playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone.
Using the USB terminal
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Using the Electone’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the
Electone and the computer.
Computer
USB TO HOST
USB cable
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals
When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the
following points. Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer, corrupting data,
and even losing data.
If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the
computer.
• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any
power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer.
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB
TO HOST terminal.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or
plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.
• Quit any open applications.
• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is
transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)
• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six
seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the
instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the
USB cable.
9
Connections
156
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the Electone
to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the
Electone and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the
OUT terminal on the Electone to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the
other connecting the IN terminal on the Electone to the MIDI OUT terminal on the
interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable.
NOTE
Depending on your particular
MIDI interface, you may have
to connect the MIDI Interface
and the computer with a
serial cable.
Computer
IN OUT
MIDI
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI Interface
(for example, UX16)
4 MIDI
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your Electone.
What is MIDI?
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a
grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy
to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings
and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But
how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
Connections
Acoustic guitar note production
9
Digital instrument note production
L
Internal amp Tone generator Internal amp
(Electric circuit)
R
Playing the keyboard
Pluck a string and the body resonates
the sound.
Based on playing information from the keyboard,
a sampled note stored in the tone generator is
played through the speakers.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
157
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the
speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for
note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the
electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it
released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored
sampled note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Voice number (with what Voice)
01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key)
60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong)
120 (strong)
As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice
selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data—including rhythm
patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc.—also consist of
MIDI messages.
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to
communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
9
Connections
158
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Messages of the Electone
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the
keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.
Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which
keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the
Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127.
The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
For more detailed information, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI
Implementation Chart” on page 178.
• Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With
these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed
information, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation
Chart” on page 178.
• Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,
modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through
specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the
Electone, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation Chart”
on page 178.
9
System Messages
Connections
• System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration
data.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
159
MIDI Channels
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,
the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent
over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts
over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs
simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to
watch the desired program.
Weather Report
NEWS
1
2
NEWS
2
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI
data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to
the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive
Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound
according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
MIDI
cable
MIDI Transmit channel 2
MIDI Receive channel 2
The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,
channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that
when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set
the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s)
of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower
and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 161 for more information.
9
Connections
160
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
5 MIDI Control
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or
computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the
Electone is controlled.
To select the MIDI page:
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 3 – 5.
<æy∫/LANGUAGE>
⁄
’i-y∫
”ENGLISH
Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 3 – 5.
Internal/External Display
1
<INT/EXT> LEAD÷INT.‹
SYNC¿INT. EXP.÷AUTO
2
3
Internal/External
Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or the
connected device (External).
1 Lead
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice.
Press the [B] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
Internal: The Lead Voice is played from the Upper Keyboard of the
Electone. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.)
9
External: The Lead Voice is played from the connected instrument via
MIDI channel 4.
Connections
2
2 Synchro
Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization
purposes.
Press the [C] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button
on the panel controls and synchronizes to any connected devices (e.g.,
sequencer, etc.).
External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts
the rhythm of the Electone.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
161
3 Expression
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this
control is set to Auto. Press the [D] button to make the indicator flash, then
use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.
Auto: Internal and External is automatically switched.
Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during
M.D.R. playback.
External: While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the
expression pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in
a USB flash memory or received MIDI data.)
MIDI Out Channel Display
1
<MIDI OUT CH> UK÷ 1›
LK¿ 2
PK÷ 3
2
3
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any
channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper
Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on
each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit
channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.
1
Upper Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard.
Press the [B] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
2
Lower Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard.
Press the [C] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
9
3
Pedalboard
Connections
You can select the channel for the Pedalboard.
Press the [D] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the setting.
MIDI Out Filter Display
<MIDI OUT FILTER>
’RHYTHM
fi
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the
Electone. Rhythm start/stop messages can be filtered on the Electone.
Successive presses [C] button alternates between being transmitted (Off ) and
not transmitted (On).
162
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
10 Appendix
Assembly Instructions
Carefully read these instructions BEFORE assembling the Electone.
Be careful not to confuse any of the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction by following the
procedures given below.
Be sure to assemble the Electone with two or more people.
Don’t use any screws other than the ones specified and included in this package. Use of incorrect screws can cause
damage and malfunction.
Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly.
Make sure to perform all assembly operations on a flat surface.
To disassemble, reverse the procedures.
You need a Phillips (+) screwdriver to assemble the Electone.
1
Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and carefully
place the main unit on top of the pads as shown.
Take care not to pinch AC power cord plug between the pads and Main unit.
Take out all parts from the package.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided.
When you take out the Speaker Unit, always hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net.
Music Rest
Dust Cover
Main Unit
Long screws (ø6 X 25 mm): 4 pcs.
Short screws (ø5 X 12 mm): 8 pcs.
Styrofoam pads
Take out the styrofoam pads, and
place the Main Unit on top of the pads.
Pedalboard cord clamps: 2 pcs.
Speaker
Unit
10
Screw caps: 4 pcs.
Grill Net
Attached to the Speaker Unit
Sideboard
(Left)
Bench
Sideboard
(Right)
Pedalboard Unit
Appendix
2
Bench Board
Legs: 4 pcs.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
163
3
Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard
unit.
4-3
Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left
Sideboards.
3-1
3-2
Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration
below.
Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard
and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and
mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using
the 4 short screws (2 screws on each Sideboard).
While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker
unit, fasten the four short screws from the rear, to
secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover
the four screw holes on the rear side with the
corresponding screw caps.
Push the Sideboard
toward the Speaker unit
Push the Sideboard
toward the Pedalboard
Short screws
Push the Sideboard
toward the Speaker unit
Screw caps
Short
screws
Screw caps
Short/black screws
3-3
Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws.
4
Mount the Speaker Unit onto the Sideboards.
4-1
4-2
5
5-1
Mount the Main Unit.
As shown in the illustration, hold the Main unit
horizontally (with two people), and place it on the
front side of the Speaker unit so that the arm at the
bottom of the Main unit comes in front of the
Sideboards, then slide it to the rear side.
Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit.
With the help of another person, hold the Speaker
unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into
place along the brackets.
1. Place down so that
the arm comes in
front of the Sideboard
10
Arm
Appendix
2. Slide to the rear side
Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your
finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit.
Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your
finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard.
164
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
5-2
Use the four long screws to fasten the Main unit to
the Sideboards as shown in the illustration.
7
Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker
cord to the Main Unit.
Make sure that the latches on each plug of the
cords face toward you, and connect them to each
socket securely.
Long screw
Speaker cord
8
8-1
Pedalboard cord
Fix the Pedalboard cord to the Sideboard
using the Pedalboard cord clamps.
Affix the two Pedalboard cord clamps to the rear
side of the Speaker unit and the lower inside of the
Left Sideboard as shown in the illustration.
Long screw
Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker.
First, align the net with the bottom line, then
secure it to the speaker assembly.
8-2
Insert the Pedalboard cord in the clamps.
10
Fasten the Grill Net by
inserting the knobs
into the holes.
Appendix
6
Shut the clamp
after inserting
the cord.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
165
9
Place the music rest on the Electone.
After completing the assembly, please check
the following items.
• Are there any parts left over?
→ Review all assembly procedures.
• Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
→ Move the Electone to an appropriate location.
• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when
you shake it?
→ Tighten all screws.
• Can the Electone be turned on?
→ Confirm that the AC power cord plug is securely
connected to an appropriate power outlet.
• Does the Electone produce sounds?
→ Confirm that the Speaker cord plug and the Pedalboard
cord plug are securely connected to each socket on the Main
unit.
10
Turn on the Electone’s power switch and
confirm that the Electone can be played, and
that the assembly is successful.
BENCH ASSEMBLY
Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place,
one by one, at the corners of the bench board, then
tighten each nut using the included wrench. Be sure
to put the washer between each leg and nut as
shown.
Leg
10
Appendix
Bench
board
166
Washer
Nut
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
If the Electone creaks or is otherwise unsteady when
you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly
instructions and tighten all screws again.
Installing Optional Hardware
Installing the Floppy Disk Drive
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed
to the bottom of the instrument by using the included
floppy disk drive case and screws. Have a Phillips-head (+)
screwdriver ready.
3
Fold the USB cable inside the case as
shown.
Attach the drive and case assembly to the
right underside of the instrument, using the
included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).
Dual-sided
adhesive tape
4
Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO
DEVICE B] terminal.
10
Appendix
1
Remove the three backing papers from the
adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy
disk drive into the case.
2
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
167
MIDI Data Format
1. Channel Messages
1.1 EL Mode
“˛” indicates “Not available.”
“Ø” indicates “Available.”
Code (Hexadecimal)
10
Appendix
168
Receive
Transmit
8n, nn, 00-7F
Note Off
Function
1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
Remarks
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note Off
Note On
1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
An, nn, 00-7F
Polyphonic After Touch
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 01, 00-7F
Modulation
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 04, 00-7F
2nd Expression
16ch
(4ch)*
˛
˛
Control
LEAD 1
Bn, 05, 00-7F
Portamento Time
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 07, 00-7F
Volume
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 0A, 00-7F
Pan
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 0B, 00-7F
Expression
16ch
5-14ch
16ch
Bn, 40, 00-7F
Hold
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 41, 00-7F
Portamento
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 42, 00-7F
Sostenuto
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 43, 00-7F
Soft Pedal
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 47, 00-7F
Resonance
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 48, 00-7F
Release Time
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 49, 00-7F
Attack Time
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 4A, 00-7F
Brightness
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 4B, 00-7F
Decay Time
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 4C, 00-7F
Vibrato Rate
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 4D, 00-7F
Vibrato Depth
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 4E, 00-7F
Vibrato Delay
5-14ch
˛
XG
Control
XG
Bn, 54, 00-7F
Portamento Control
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 5B, 00-7F
Reverb Send Level
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 5D, 00-7F
Chorus Send Level
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 5E, 00-7F
Variation Effect Send Level
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
5-14ch
˛
XG
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
5-14ch
˛
XG
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Code (Hexadecimal)
Function
Receive
Transmit
Remarks
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
5-14ch
˛
XG
Cn, nn
Program Change
5-14ch
16ch
˛
16ch
XG
Control
Dn, 00-7F
After Touch
1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
En, 00-7F, 00-7F
Pitch Bend
5-14ch
XG
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 161).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
1.2 XG Mode
Code (Hexadecimal)
Function
Receive
1-16ch
Transmit
8n, nn, 00-7F
Note Off
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note On
Note Off
An, nn, 00-7F
Polyphonic After Touch
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 01, 00-7F
Modulation
Remarks
˛
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
1-16ch
˛
1-16ch
Bn, 04, 00-7F
2nd Expression
˛
˛
Bn, 05, 00-7F
Portamento Time
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 07, 00-7F
Volume
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 0A, 00-7F
Pan
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 0B, 00-7F
Expression
16ch
Control
1-16ch
Hold
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 41, 00-7F
Portamento
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 42, 00-7F
Sostenuto
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 43, 00-7F
Soft Pedal
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 47, 00-7F
Resonance
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 48, 00-7F
Release Time
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 49, 00-7F
Attack Time
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 4A, 00-7F
Brightness
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 4B, 00-7F
Decay Time
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 4C, 00-7F
Vibrato Rate
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 4D, 00-7F
Vibrato Depth
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 4E, 00-7F
Vibrato Delay
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 54, 00-7F
Portamento Control
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 5B, 00-7F
Reverb Send Level
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 5D, 00-7F
Chorus Send Level
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 5E, 00-7F
Variation Effect Send Level
1-16ch
˛
10
Appendix
Bn, 40, 00-7F
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
169
Code (Hexadecimal)
Function
Receive
Transmit
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
1-16ch
˛
Cn, 00-7F
Program Change
Remarks
16ch
Control
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
1-16ch
Dn, 00-7F
After Touch
En, 00-7F, 00-7F
Pitch Bend
1-16ch
1-16ch
˛
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 161).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
2. Realtime Messages
Code (Hexadecimal)
Function
Receive
Transmit
EL mode
XG mode
F8
Clock
Ø*
˛
Ø
FA
Start
Ø
˛
Ø
FC
Stop
Ø
˛
Ø
FE
Active Sensing
Ø
Ø
Ø
FF
Reset
˛
˛
˛
Remarks
* Received only when in the Ext. mode
3. System Exclusive Messages
3.1 Format
Universal Realtime Messages
Code (Hexadecimal)
10
Appendix
170
Receive
Transmit
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Volume
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Fine Tuning
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Coarse Tuning
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Reverb Parameter
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Chorus Parameter
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 After Touch Parameter
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Control Change Parameter
Ø
˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Key-Based Controller
Ø
˛
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Message
Universal Non-Realtime Messages
Receive
Transmit
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7
XN
Code (Hexadecimal)
GM ON
Message
Ø
˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7
XN
GM2 ON
Ø
˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7
XN
GM OFF
Ø
˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7
XN
GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning
Ø
˛
XG Native
Receive
Transmit
F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7
Code (Hexadecimal)
XG Parameter Change
Message
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7
XG Bulk Dump
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7
XG Master Tuning
Ø
˛
Receive
Transmit
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Clavinova Exclusive
Code (Hexadecimal)
F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7
03
Message
Request for Internal Synch. Mode
Request for External Synch. Mode
Message Exclusive
Receive
Transmit
F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7
Code (Hexadecimal)
Rhythm Start
Message
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7
Rhythm Stop
Ø
˛
Electone Exclusive
Receive
Transmit
Bulk Dump Data
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7
Model ID Data
˛
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7
Request-to-Send Model ID Data
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 38, 7F, F7
00
Bulk Dump Acknowledged
Bulk Dump Unacknowledged
˛
˛
˛
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7
00
Switch ON
Switch OFF
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7
Tempo
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2)
Panel Switch Events
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7
Current Registration Data
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7
MIDI Parameters
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7
MDR
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7
EL ON
Ø
˛
Bar Signal
˛
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7
˛: don’t care
N: Device Number (only “0”)
Message
10
Appendix
Code (Hexadecimal)
F0, 43, 70, 70, 00, ..data.., F7
78
ID
ID: Model ID (ELB-01=4FH)
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
171
*1.
Switches
nn
Switch
Receive
Transmit
45H
Left Footswitch
Ø
Ø
47H
Knee Lever
Ø
Ø
4DH
Solo Bar
Ø
Ø
*2.
Panel Switch Events
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7
Selectors
cc
Switch
Code
0F
Registration Memory [1-16]
dd
Remarks
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Ø
[00-0F]
˛
-
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Volume
cc
Switch
Code
dd
Remarks
12
Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
13
Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
14
Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
15
Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
16
Lead Voice 1 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
17
Pedal Voice 1 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
18
Pedal Voice 2 Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1A
Percussion Volume
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1B
Reverb Depth
Ø
[00-7F]
Ø
[00-7F]
Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
To Lower
cc
Switch
Code
dd
Remarks
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
36
Lead Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▼]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
37
Pedal Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
38
Pedal Voice 2 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Sustain
cc
Switch
Code
10
dd
Remarks
50
Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
51
Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
52
Pedal Sustain [PEDAL]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
Keyboard Percussion
Appendix
cc
Switch
Code
dd
Remarks
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5B
Keyboard Percussion [1]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
5C
Keyboard Percussion [2]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
Disable
cc
Switch
Code
5F
172
Disable [D.]
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
dd
Remarks
00:OFF, 01:ON
Rotary Speaker
cc
Switch
dd
Code
60
Remarks
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
Rotary Speaker Speed
[ROTARY SP SPEED]
00:OFF, 01:ON
Rhythm Sequence
cc
Switch
dd
Code
*3.
Remarks
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
61
Sequence 1 [SEQ.1]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
62
Sequence 2 [SEQ.2]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
63
Sequence 3 [SEQ.3]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
64
Sequence 4 [SEQ.4]
Ø
[00-01]
Ø
[00-01]
00:OFF, 01:ON
MIDI Parameter
Voice Section Parameters
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7
Address
Size
Data
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
00-0D
5
00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
Voice Assign Number
00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
Ø
00-7F
00-7F
00-02
00
00
Ø
00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
00-07
10
1
00-0D
Voice Selector Number
00-07
11
1
00-7F
Volume
00:MIN
7F:MAX
00-0D
Ø
00-0D
Ø
00-0D
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
10
00-07
12
1
00-7F
Reverb (Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
10
00-07
14
1
00-04
Feet
00:PRESET
01:16'
02:8'
03:4'
04:2'
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-04
10
00-07
15
1
00-7F
Pan
00:LEFT
40:CENTER
7F:RIGHT
Ø
00-7F
Ø
08-78
10
00-07
16
1
00-7F
Touch Tone Initial Touch
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
10
00-07
19
1
00-7F
User Vibrato
00:PRESET
01:USER
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
10
00-07
1A
1
00-7F
Vibrato Delay
00:SHORT
7F:LONG
Ø
00-7F
Ø
02-1A
10
00-07
1B
1
00-7F
Vibrato Depth
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-54
10
00-07
1C
1
00-7F
Vibrato Speed
00:SLOW
7F:FAST
Ø
00-7F
Ø
3C-6C
10
04-07
1F
1
00-7F
TO LOWER▼/▲
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
10
04-05
20
1
00-02
Slide (On/Knee Lever/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
02:Knee Lever
Ø
00-02
Ø
00-01
10
04-05
21
1
00-7F
Slide Time
00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø
00-7F
Ø
02-7F
10
00-07
22
1
00-7F
Tune/Detune
00:Down
40:Center
7F:Up
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
10
00-01/
04-07
23
1
00-7F
2nd Expression Pitch Bend
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
00-01
10
00-05
24
1
00-7F
Footswitch Glide Control
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
hh
mm
ll
10
00-07
10
10
Parameter
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
10
Appendix
Panel Voice Parameters
(Address mm: 0 – 4, 6 – 7 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, LEAD 1, PEDAL 1, PEDAL 2)
173
Address
Size
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
25
1
3A-46
Transpose
3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø
3A-46
Ø
3A-46
00-07
2A
1
00-7F
Volume Mute
00:Mute OFF
01:Mute ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
10
00-07
40
3
00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB
00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø
00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø
00
00-7F
00-7F
10
00-07
41
2
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
42
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
43
2
10
00-07
44
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
45
0000-7F7F
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
0000-7F7F
46
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
10
00-07
47
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
00-07
48
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
49
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
4A
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
4B
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 11
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
4C
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 12
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
4D
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 13
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
4E
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 14
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
4F
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 15
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
10
00-07
50
2
0000-7F7F
Effect 1 Parameter 16
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
hh
mm
ll
10
00-07
10
Parameter
Data
Keyboard Parameters
Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL)
Address
Size
Data
00
1
00-7F
Sustain (On/Off)
01
1
00-7F
Length
hh
mm
ll
12
00-02
12
00-02
Parameter
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
00:Short
7F:Long
Ø
00-7F
Ø
15-3D
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2])
Address
Size
Data
10
1
00-7F
Keyboard Percussion (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
11
1
00-08
Keyboard Percussion Menu
00:PRESET
01:USER 1
02:USER 2
03:USER 3
04:USER 4
05:USER 5
06:USER 6
07:USER 7
08:USER 8
Ø
00-08
Ø
00-08
hh
mm
ll
12
01-02
12
01-02
10
Appendix
174
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Parameter
Data
Rhythm
Rhythm Parameters
Address
Size
Data
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
00-0B
2
0000-7F7F
0000-7F7F
Ø
00-7F
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
00-7F
00
10
1
00-0B
Rhythm Selector Number
00
11
1
00-7F
Percussion Volume
00:MIN
7F:MAX
00-0B
Ø
00-0B
Ø
00-0B
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
13
00
12
1
00-7F
Percussion Reverb (Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
13
00
13
1
00-7F
2nd Expression
Tempo Control (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
00-01
13
00
14
1
00-7F
Footswitch Rhythm Control
00:INTRO 1
01:INTRO 2
02:INTRO 3
08:MAIN A
09:MAIN B
0A:MAIN C
0B:MAIN D
18:BREAK
20:ENDING 1
21:ENDING 2
22:ENDING 3
7E:STOP
7F:OFF
(INTRO 1 –
STOP)
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
13
00
15
1
00-7F
Add Drum (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
16
1
00-7F
Main Drum (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
17
1
00-7F
Chord 1 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
18
1
00-7F
Chord 2 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
19
1
00-7F
Pad (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
1A
1
00-7F
Phrase 1 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
1B
1
00-7F
Phrase 2 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
00
1C
1
00-7F
Auto Fill (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
hh
mm
ll
13
00
13
13
Parameter
Rhythm Assign Number
Rhythm Sequence Parameters
Address
hh
mm
ll
13
01
00-03
Size
Data
1
00-7F
Parameter
Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4]
Data
00:OFF
01:ON
Accompaniment Parameters
Size
Data
11
1
00-7F
Accompaniment Volume
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
12
1
00-7F
Accompaniment Reverb
(Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
mm
ll
13
02
13
02
Parameter
Data
10
Appendix
Address
hh
A.B.C. Function Parameters
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
00
1
00-7F
03
01
1
03
02
1
hh
mm
ll
13
03
13
13
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Auto Bass Chord Mode
00:OFF
01:Single Finger
02:Fingered
03:Custom A.B.C.
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-03
00-7F
Lower Memory (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
00-7F
Pedal Memory (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
175
M.O.C. Function Parameters
Address
Size
Data
00
1
00-7F
Melody On Chord Mode
01
1
00-7F
M.O.C. Knee Lever Control
(On/Off)
Size
Data
hh
mm
ll
13
04
13
04
Parameter
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
00-01
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Section Parameters
Address
Parameter
Data
hh
mm
ll
13
05
00
1
00-7F
Intro 1 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
01
1
00-7F
Intro 2 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
02
1
00-7F
Intro 3 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
08
1
00-7F
Main A (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
09
1
00-7F
Main B (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
0A
1
00-7F
Main C (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
0B
1
00-7F
Main D (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
18
1
00-7F
Break (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
20
1
00-7F
Ending 1 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
21
1
00-7F
Ending 2 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
13
05
22
1
00-7F
Ending 3 (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Keyboard Percussion Parameters
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Data
hh
mm
ll
13
10
11
1
00-7F
Volume
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
13
10
12
1
00-7F
Reverb (Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
Size
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Overall
System Parameters
Address
10
Appendix
176
Parameter
Data
hh
mm
ll
14
00
00
1
00-7F
Disable (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
14
00
02
1
3A-46
Transpose
3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø
3A-46
Ø
3A-46
14
00
03
1
01-0C
2nd Expression Range
01:100 C
0C:1200 C
Ø
01-0C
˛
01-0C
14
00
04
1
00-7F
Footswitch Mode
00:OFF
01:Rhythm
02:Glide
03:Rotary Speaker
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-03
14
00
05
1
00-7F
Pitch
00:PitchDown
40:Normal
7F:PitchUp
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-7F
14
00
06
1
00-7F
Footswitch Glide Time
00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø
00-7F
Ø
04-1C
14
00
08
1
00-7F
MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT)
00:Internal
01:External
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Address
Size
Data
09
1
00-7F
MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT)
0A
3
00-05
00-07
00-0B
Registration Menu
hh
mm
ll
14
00
14
00
Parameter
Data
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
00:Internal
01:External
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
00-05
00-07
00-0B
Ø
00-05
00-07
00-0B
Ø
00-05
00-07
00-0B
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb
Address
Size
Data
Parameter
Data
hh
mm
ll
14
01
00
1
00-7F
Reverb Depth
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
14
01
01
1
00-7F
Reverb Time (Panel)
00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-45
14
01
02
3
00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Panel)
00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø
00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø
00
00-7F
00-7F
Receive
Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker
Address
Size
Data
00
1
00-7F
Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
˛
-
03
01
1
00-7F
Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Mode
00:STOP
01:SLOW
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
03
02
2
0000007F
Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Speed
0000:SLOW
007F:FAST
Ø
0000-007F
Ø
0040-007F
hh
mm
ll
14
03
14
14
Data
MDR
Receive
Transmit
01H
nn
Play Start
Command
Ø
˛
02H
Play Stop
Ø
˛
03H
Record Start
Ø
˛
04H
Record Stop
Ø
˛
05H
Fast Forward Start
Ø
˛
06H
Fast Forward Stop
Ø
˛
09H
Rhythm Pointer Reset
Ø
˛
10
Appendix
*4.
Parameter
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
177
MIDI Implementation Chart
Date: 03-Mar-2005
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: ELB-01
Function
Transmitted
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1, 2, 3, 16 (*1)
1-16
1-3, 5-16 (*2)
4
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
˛
************************
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127 (*4)
:True Voice
36-96 (*3)
************************
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
˛
Ø
Ø (*5)
Ø
Ø
Ø (*5)
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø (*6)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø (*5)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*6)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*5, 6)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*5)
Ø (*9)
************************
Ø (*10)
Ø
Ø
Note
Number
Velocity
Note on
Note off
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
96, 97
64-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
98-99, 100-101
:True number
System Exclusive
10
System
Common
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
Ø
Ø
Ø (*8)
Ø
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø (120) (*5)
Ø (121) (*5)
˛
Ø (123-127) (*5)
Ø
˛
Appendix
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
178
Recognized
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
*1;
*2;
*3;
*4;
*5;
*7;
*9;
*10;
Remarks
Bank Select
2nd Expression
Data Entry
Expression
Data Entry SW
Sound Controller
NRPN, RPN
(FAH, FCH)
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL
UK: 36-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60
UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127
*6; CONTROL only
XG only
*8; External Mode only
UK only
CONTROL: 0-15
UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Date: 03-Mar-2005
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: ELB-01
Function
Transmitted (*1)
Recognized
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1, 2, 3, 16
1-16
1-16
1-16
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode3
˛
************************
Mode 3
˛
˛
36-96
************************
0-127
:True Voice
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø 0-15
************************
Ø
System Exclusive
Ø
Ø
System
Common
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Aux
Messages
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø (120)
Ø (121)
˛
Ø (123-127)
Ø
˛
Note
Number
Note on
Note off
Velocity
Key's
Ch's
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
96, 97
64-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
98-99, 100-101
:True number
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
*1;
Remarks
Bank Select
2nd Expression
Data Entry
Expression
Data Entry SW
Sound Controller
NRPN, RPN
10
Appendix
MIDI Implementation chart
Same as that in the EL mode
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
179
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after
turning the power on.
This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard.
Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this
occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible
from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs.
This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an
amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
The sound of the Electone causes surrounding
objects to resonate.
Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,
resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass
windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.
Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section do
not light.
The lamps above the [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button and the [SUSTAIN]
button will light up when the function is turned on in the display.
The sound is too small even when the volume is set to
its maximum.
• The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around the minimum position. Turn it
clockwise.
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your
toe.
The Electone panel does not function normally or the
content of the memorized data has changed.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/
or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory
Set operation to reset the Electone (page 20).
VOICES/RHYTHMS
When a key is pressed, two or more Voices sound.
Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or
Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or
set the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page
29).
As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice
of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display after
switching to the Voice section 2.
The pitch may sound excessively high on the
Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the
Lower and Upper keyboards.
This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely
sounds.
added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
10
Appendix
180
When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes
sound.
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 10 notes.
Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead
or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.
For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that
only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time.
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the
volume is properly set.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn
off the mode in the display (page 71).
• TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the
function off (page 31).
When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion
instruments are also heard.
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 77).
Even though a User button’s rhythm has been
selected and started, the pattern does not sound.
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern
has not been saved to the selected User button.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
EFFECTS
The Initial Touch function does not operate.
Adjust the Initial Touch settings in the Voice Condition display (page 42).
The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice
sections, even when the Reverb setting in the Voice
Condition display Page 1 set to maximum.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb display.
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even
when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY
SELECT section is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display.
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change,
even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing,
the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound,
even when the keys are played.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
an Intro/Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an
appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the
rhythm has been started.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 70).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 68).
The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function
cannot be heard.
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the
volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been memorized to
Registration Memory.
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 98.
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
Recording or playback cannot be performed.
• The part buttons may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or
PLAY.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
• The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the
media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record
the song to it.
Recording is stopped before the performance is
finished.
• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part
cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded song, then record again (page 121).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
An error message appears while entering a folder
name or song name.
• The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters.
• The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 124.
• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234
characters. Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten
the path.
The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display.
Appendix
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a
recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.
10
The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted.
format an unformatted disk.
Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.
The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound
continuously.
During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory or floppy
disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [STOP] button
before removing the media.
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
181
Specifications
Electone STAGEA
ELB-01
TONE GENERATION
AWM (2)
KEYBOARD
Upper: 49 (C – C)/Lower: 49 (C – C)/Pedal: 20 (C – G)
Keyboard Type
Basic
Initial Touch
REGISTRATION
VOICE
Upper, Lower
Registration Memory
16
Registration Menu
240 + 90
Voice Sections
Voice Buttons
Upper: 2, Lead: 1, Lower: 2, Pedal: 2
Upper/Lower
RHYTHM
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER
Pedal
CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER
245
Sustain
Upper, Lower, Pedal
Reverb
25
Effects
Reverb, Delay, Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan,
Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Thru
Preset Rhythm Pattern
Rhythm Buttons
Main Drum, Add Drum
Sections
Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill
Accompaniment Parts
Auto Bass Chord
✔
Settings
Preset 1, 2, User 1 – 8
Kits
Wonderland Kit, EL, Standard Kit 1, 2, Hit, Room, Rock, Electro, Analog, Jazz, Brush,
Symphony, SFX1, 2, Arabic
✔
Assign
CONTROLS
Footswitch Left
Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker Speed
Registration Shift
Shift, Jump, User (80)
✔
Expression Pedal
Transpose
-6 – +6
Pitch
A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz
MIDI Control
✔
Main Controls
POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME
M.D.R.
10
• Stop, Play, Custom Play, Rec, Pause, Fast Forward, Rewind
• Tempo (50 – 200%), Repeat Setting, Change Song Name, Remaining Memory, Format,
Song Copy, Song/folder Delete, Convert ELB→EL, Convert EL→ELB, Convert To XG,
Registration Load/Save/Delete, Create folder
Utility
Language (English/Japanese), Version
Display Select
Appendix
SOUND SYSTEM
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, RHYTHM SEQUENCE,
SUSTAIN, REVERB, ROTARY SP SPEED
Power Amplifiers
60 W (Stereo)
Speakers
OTHERS
Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2
OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal
Melody On Chord
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
133
MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD,
ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2
Parts
ACCOMPANIMENT
STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN,
PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2
Lead
Preset Voice
EFFECT/CONDITION
M. (Memory) 1 – 8 (9 – 16), D. (Disable)
Basic Registration
16 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2
LCD Display
20 x 2 Character
Storage
USB x 2
Connectors
PHONES, AUX OUT: L/R, MIDI IN/OUT, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE: A, B
Power Consumption
64 W
Dimensions, Weight
1112.3 (W) x 485.8 (D) x 936 (H) mm, 1123.9 (W) mm (with Music Rest), 55 kg
Bench
596 (W) x 296 (D) x 580 (H) mm, 6.2 kg
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or
specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
182
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Index
[A] – [D] buttons ....................................................................... 17
A.B.C......................................................................................... 71
A.B.C./M.O.C. ........................................................................... 71
Accompaniment........................................................................ 68
Add Drum ................................................................................. 68
Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 71
Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 60
AUX OUT (L/R)........................................................................ 151
AWM Voice ................................................................................. 8
B
BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 61
BREAK ...................................................................................... 58
Feet............................................................................................42
File ...........................................................................................116
FILL IN .......................................................................................58
Fingered Chord .........................................................................72
FLANGER ............................................................................45, 53
floppy disk ...............................................................................107
Folder ..............................................................................113, 116
Folder Delete ...........................................................................139
Folder Name............................................................................122
FOOTSWITCH .................................................................102, 146
Footswitch (Left) ......................................................................146
Footswitch (Right)....................................................................102
Format (M.D.R.) .......................................................................109
G
C
Glide ........................................................................................148
Changing the Song/Folder Name ........................................... 122
Channel Messages ................................................................. 159
Chord 1 ..................................................................................... 69
Chord 2 ..................................................................................... 69
CHORUS (Effect) ................................................................ 45, 53
Control Change....................................................................... 159
Convert EL -> ELB .................................................................. 142
Convert ELB -> EL .................................................................. 141
Convert to XG ......................................................................... 144
Custom A.B.C. .......................................................................... 72
H
D
[D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 99
DATA CONTROL dial.......................................................... 11, 17
DELAY (Effect) .................................................................... 45, 52
Delay (Vibrato) .......................................................................... 44
Delete (Registration Shift) ....................................................... 105
Delete (Song/Folder)............................................................... 139
Depth (Reverb) ......................................................................... 48
Depth (Vibrato) ......................................................................... 44
Display Select (Panel)............................................................... 11
DISTORTION....................................................................... 45, 54
DYNAMIC............................................................................ 45, 55
E
Effect......................................................................................... 45
Effect Category (Voice)............................................................. 45
Effect List .................................................................................. 52
Effect Parameters ............................................................... 46, 52
Effect Type (Voice) ................................................................... 46
ENDING .................................................................................... 58
EQ/ENHANCER .................................................................. 45, 55
Expression Pedal .................................................................... 162
Expression pedal ...................................................................... 13
F
Factory Set................................................................................ 20
Fast Forward ........................................................................... 134
Headphones............................................................................153
I
Icons........................................................................................116
Index........................................................................................183
indicator.....................................................................................17
Initial Touch ...............................................................................42
Initialize (Factory set) ................................................................20
Initialize (Registration Memory) ...............................................100
Internal/External (MIDI)............................................................161
INTRO........................................................................................58
J
Jacks and Controls..................................................................151
Jump........................................................................................103
K
KARAOKE............................................................................45, 52
Keyboard Percussion ................................................................77
L
Language ..................................................................................19
LCD display...............................................................................17
Lead Voice ................................................................................21
LEAD VOICE (Panel) .................................................................10
Lower Keyboard Voice ..............................................................22
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ...................................10
10
Appendix
A
M
[M.] (Memory)............................................................................98
M.D.R.......................................................................................107
M.O.C. .......................................................................................74
MAIN..........................................................................................58
Main Drum .................................................................................68
MAIN/FILL IN .............................................................................60
MASTER VOLUME.....................................................................13
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
183
Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 74
Memory (A.B.C.) ....................................................................... 73
Metronome................................................................................ 67
MIDI ........................................................................................ 157
MIDI Control............................................................................ 161
MIDI IN/OUT ................................................................... 152, 157
MIDI Out.................................................................................. 162
Mode (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 50
Music Data Recorder (MDR) .................................................. 107
N
Next (Shift End)....................................................................... 106
Next Regist ............................................................................. 129
P
Pad............................................................................................ 69
PAGE buttons ........................................................................... 18
PAGE Buttons (Panel)............................................................... 11
Panning..................................................................................... 43
Part (M.D.R.) ........................................................................... 119
Part (Rhythm) ............................................................................ 68
Pause ...................................................................................... 134
Pedal Voice............................................................................... 22
PEDAL VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ........................................................ 10
PHASER .............................................................................. 45, 53
PHONES ................................................................................. 151
Phrase 1.................................................................................... 69
Phrase 2.................................................................................... 69
Pitch ........................................................................................ 150
Pitch (Voice section) ................................................................. 43
Playback ................................................................................. 133
POWER ..................................................................................... 12
PRESET (Effect) ........................................................................ 45
Preset (Vibrato) ......................................................................... 44
Preset Keyboard Percussion .................................................... 77
Program Change .................................................................... 159
Protected Song ....................................................................... 139
Punch-in Recording ................................................................ 121
R
10
Appendix
184
Recording ............................................................................... 117
Recording (Each Part) ............................................................ 118
Registration Memory................................................................. 97
Registration Menu..................................................................... 14
Registration Menu List .............................................................. 15
Registration Shift..................................................................... 102
Rename................................................................................... 122
Repeat .................................................................................... 135
REVERB .................................................................................... 48
Reverb ...................................................................................... 42
Reverb (Accompaniment)......................................................... 70
REVERB (Effect)........................................................................ 52
Reverb (Rhythm)....................................................................... 62
Reverb (Voice condition) .......................................................... 45
Rewind .................................................................................... 134
Rhythm...................................................................................... 56
Rhythm buttons......................................................................... 56
Rhythm Condition ..................................................................... 62
RHYTHM CONTROL (Panel)..................................................... 10
Rhythm List ............................................................................... 67
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Menu ............................................................................56
Rhythm Sequence .....................................................................75
ROTARY SP SPEED...................................................................50
ROTARY SPEAKER .............................................................45, 54
Rotary Speaker..........................................................................50
S
section .......................................................................................58
Shift (Registration Shift) ...........................................................103
Shift End ..................................................................................106
Single Finger .............................................................................72
Slide...........................................................................................47
Song ................................................................................111, 116
Song Copy...............................................................................137
Song Delete.............................................................................139
Song Name..............................................................................122
Specifications ..........................................................................182
Speed (Rotary Speaker)............................................................50
Speed (Vibrato) .........................................................................44
START........................................................................................57
Stop (Shift End) .......................................................................106
Style File Format ..........................................................................5
Sustain.......................................................................................49
SYNCHRO START .....................................................................59
System Exclusive Messages ...................................................159
T
Tempo (Rhythm)........................................................................61
THRU ...................................................................................45, 55
To Lower....................................................................................31
Top (Shift End).........................................................................106
Touch (Initial touch)...................................................................42
Transpose................................................................................150
Transpose (Voice section).........................................................43
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN ........................................................45, 53
Tune (Voice section)..................................................................43
U
UD-FD01..................................................................................167
Upper Keyboard Voice..............................................................21
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ....................................10
USB TO DEVICE A ..................................................................151
USB TO DEVICE B ..................................................................152
USB TO HOST .........................................................................152
User (Registration Shift) ..........................................................103
User (Vibrato) ............................................................................44
User button (Rhythm) ................................................................63
User button (Voice) ...................................................................32
User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................88
UTILITY....................................................................................150
V
Version.......................................................................................20
Vibrato .......................................................................................44
Voice (Voice section 2)..............................................................29
Voice buttons.............................................................................25
Voice Condition display.......................................................27, 41
Voice Display.............................................................................23
Voice Menu................................................................................25
VOICE SECTION....................................................................... 25
Voice section 1 ......................................................................... 25
Voices ....................................................................................... 21
Volume (Accompaniment) ........................................................ 70
Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ................................................ 78
Volume (Rhythm) ................................................................ 57, 62
Volume (Voice).................................................................... 26, 42
Volume (XG)............................................................................ 136
W
WAH.................................................................................... 45, 54
X
XG ............................................................................................... 5
Appendix
10
ELB-01 Owner’s Manual
185
Memo
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o
el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 044-387-8080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office)
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Poland Office
ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: 022-500-2925
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: 02-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida
MSD06
Tel: 02133-2144
DMI4
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial
Denmark
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,
121059, Russia
Tel: 495 626 5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
ASIA
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector
47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 021-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 03-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED
Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: 6747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2622
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation
WF12580 209MWAP*.*-01C1
Printed in China